JP2020062540A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reduce disadvantages to a player caused by player's forgetfulness of performing return processing of a card, a coin, and the like with respect to a game medium dispenser unit (a card read unit).SOLUTION: In a state where negotiable value information stored in a storage medium is read into an external device, a predetermined external control signal output from the external device is received by external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by external signal extraction means. Whether or not the negotiable value information of the storage medium is read into the external device is discriminated by external discrimination means. On condition that the external discrimination means discriminates that the negotiable value information of the storage medium is read into the external device, when it is discriminated that player detection means for detecting a player does not detect the player, the state where the negotiable value information is read into the external device is notified by notification means. This process can prevent player's forgetfulness of performing return processing or cancellation processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a gaming medium such as a game ball to a gaming machine by using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend a gaming medium The one to be attached to was proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-221336

  However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine only controls to dispense a game medium according to a command from the lending unit (card reading unit) side, and the gaming machine side does not control the lending unit. Therefore, it is impossible for the gaming machine to determine whether the lending unit has a card, coin or the like inserted therein. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the player cannot forget to remove the card, coin, etc., and the player forgets to remove the card, coin, etc., resulting in theft or loss. there were.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like. A player forgets to return a card, coin, or the like to a unit for renting out game media (card reading unit). It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disadvantages of the above.

  In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and is output corresponding to the read valuable value information. When the payout means for paying out the game medium according to the lending request signal for requesting the game machine to lend the game medium and the external device have read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the game machine External receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to, and an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. , An external discriminating means for discriminating whether the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means. In a state where the external device determines that the valuable value information of the storage medium is being read, when the player detection unit does not detect the player, the external device informs the player of the storage medium. And a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the valuable information is being read.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. A payout means for paying out a game medium in accordance with a lending request signal for performing the predetermined value, and a predetermined external control output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. In a gaming machine having an external receiving means for receiving a signal, the external device is a storage medium based on the external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. External discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the valuable value information of the game is being read, game execution discriminating means for discriminating the period during which the game is being played by the player, and the game execution thereof. When it is determined by the determining means that the game has not been played for a predetermined period or more, the external determining means determines that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. And an informing means for informing a player of an informing mode indicating that the external device is in a state where the valuable information of the storage medium is being read.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium in accordance with the read valuable value information. A payout means for paying out a game medium in accordance with a lending request signal for storing, a storage means capable of storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the gaming machine. An ejecting means for ejecting by a player's operation, and an external device for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. In a gaming machine having a receiving means, a storage discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are stored in the storing means, and a discharging operation for discriminating whether or not the discharging of the game balls has been carried out by the discharging means. A state in which the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the determination means, the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal, and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. If the external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the ejecting operation is discriminated by the ejecting operation discriminating means, and if the storing discriminating means discriminates that the game ball is not stored, the external discriminating means judges that When it is determined that the device is in the state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the player is notified of a notification mode indicating that the external device is in the state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. And notifying means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, based on the operating means having an operating portion operable by a player, and the operating means being operated, the external device is Operation signal output means for outputting to the external device a return signal for executing a return process for returning the read storage medium to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium, and setting Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means, based on satisfaction of a condition. , With.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 5, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. For receiving the lending request signal for paying out the game medium, and a storage medium read by the external device on the basis of the operating means having an operating part operable by the player and the operating means being operated. An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return processing for returning the player to the player or a release processing for canceling the reading of the valuable value information in the storage medium, and an operating section of the operating means. And a forced return control means for outputting a return signal to the operation signal output means on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined trigger even when is not operated. A.

  According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect, it is possible to distinguish a win / loss determination means for performing a win / loss determination of a game based on the satisfaction of a win / loss determination condition and a win / fail determination result of the win / loss determination means. Display control means for displaying different identification information on the display means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player when the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit / miss judgment result is a hit The game execution means and the forced return control means output the return signal to the operation signal output means on the basis of the hit / no hit judgment result of the hit / no hit judgment means.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 7, in the gaming machine according to claim 6, when the win / win determination condition is met, a start condition for displaying identification information of win / win determination corresponding to the win / win decision condition is met. Until then, the win / fail judgment storage means for storing the hit / no hit judgment condition and the hit / no hit judgment result corresponding to the hit / no hit judgment condition stored in the hit / nozzle decision storage means are judged before the start condition is met. And an advance advance / non-execution determination means, wherein the forced return control means outputs the return signal to the operation signal output means on the basis of the fact that the advance / reduction determination means is judged to be a hit. .

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and lends the gaming medium to be output corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.

  The player is detected by the player detecting means. When the external determination unit determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, and the player detection unit does not detect the player, the external device is stored in the player. The notification means notifies the notification mode indicating that the valuable value information of the medium is being read.

  Thus, even if the player leaves the seat while the external device reads the valuable information of the storage medium, the external device reads the valuable information of the storage medium by the notification mode. It is possible to make the player notice that Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being stolen from the storage medium and being damaged by the misuse of the valuable information.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is lent out in accordance with the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine.

  The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the external determination means determines whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. The game execution determining means determines the period during which the player is playing the game. When the game execution determining means determines that the game has not been played for a predetermined period of time or more, the external determining means determines that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Then, the notification means notifies the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.

  As a result, even when the player finishes playing the game with the external device reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium by the notification mode. Can be announced early. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being stolen from the storage medium and being damaged by the misuse of the valuable information.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is lent corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting. The game balls paid out to the player by the payout means are stored by the storage means. The discharging means discharges the game balls stored in the storing means to the outside of the gaming machine by a player's operation. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means.

  Whether or not the game balls are stored in the storage means is determined by the storage determination means. Whether the game balls have been discharged by the discharging means is judged by the discharging operation judging means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the external determination means determines whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. When it is determined that the discharge operation is performed by the discharge operation determination means, and when the storage determination means determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination means reads the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external device. If it is determined that the player is in the state, the notifying unit notifies the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.

  As a result, when the game is finished, the operation of ejecting the game medium to the outside of the game machine is executed, and when the game medium is not detected in the storage means, the valuable information of the storage medium is read in the external device. If it is in a state, it is notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game with the external device reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Therefore, there is an effect that the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable value information can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the operation unit operation means that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the release process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the establishment of the setting condition, the switching control means switches between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means.

  As a result, even if the player forgets the return processing or the cancellation processing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable value information by switching to the prohibited state.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 5, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and the gaming machine is lent out based on the read valuable value information to the gaming machine. The game medium is paid out based on the lending request signal for requesting.

  Based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation means is not operated, the return signal is output by the forced return control means to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger.

  Thereby, the storage medium read by the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be released to the external device under the control of the gaming machine side. Therefore, the player can forget the operation of returning the storage medium or the process of releasing the valuable information, thereby reducing the damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information. is there.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 5, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays on the display means identification information capable of identifying the result of the judgment. When the display unit displays the identification information indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit, the privilege game executing unit executes the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player. Then, the return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss determination means.

  As a result, it is possible to return the storage medium read in the external device or cancel reading the valuable value information based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player does not have to be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the external device has read the valuable value information of the storage medium, and forgetting the return process or the cancellation process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the player caused by the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable information.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 6, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. To be done. The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the fact that the advance hit determination means determines that the hit is successful.

  As a result, the return process or the cancellation process is executed by the external device before the identification information indicating the win / loss judgment result is displayed on the display unit, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the win / loss judgment result in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the cancellation process will not be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the opening image at the time of the jackpot start of a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the card return fluctuation mode displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure showing a display mode of a password setting screen displayed on a display screen, and (b) is a figure showing a display mode of a password input screen displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure which showed the notification mode of the card insertion displayed on a display screen, (b) is a figure which showed the notification mode of the card balance displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure showing a balance indicator, and (b) is a figure showing a frame button of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a connection between a card reading unit and a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing connection between a balance indicator and a card reading unit in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing connection between a return button and a card reading unit of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A)-(d) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing various counter values used by a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM of a main controller, (b) was the figure which showed the jackpot random number table, (c) showed the jackpot type table. It is a figure and (d) is a figure showing a random number table per universal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the card process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting production process which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hold change process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the card production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a card notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the card return production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the password input processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the password processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the break process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the structure at the time of locking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure at the time of unlocking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows shutter input processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a shutter process that is one process of a shutter setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 7B) is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. As shown in FIG. 7B, the frame button 22 is a decision button 22a, an up button 22b for mainly designating an upward direction, a left button 22c for mainly designating a left direction, and a downward direction mainly for designating. The downward direction button 22d and the rightward button for mainly designating the rightward direction are configured.

  The decision button 22a is, for example, a case of performing an operation of selecting (deciding with the entered password) a setting button displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) described later, etc. Is operated by the player. The up button 22b, for example, in the password setting screen, moves up the selection image (the background color of the displayed number changes) showing the selected number for one digit of the password selected by the cursor. Move to. In addition, the down button 22d moves the selected image indicating the selected number in the downward direction. As will be described later, the password is composed of four-digit numbers, and by moving the cursor left or right with the right direction button 22c or the left direction button 22e, the digit for selecting the number is determined. When the player operates the left direction button 22c, the cursor moves one digit to the left. When the player operates the right direction button 22e, the cursor moves one digit to the right. In addition, the up button 22b, the left button 22c, the down button 22d, the right button 22e, for example, when moving the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up, down, left and right, the direction is specified to the player. You may comprise so that it may be used for it suitably.

  Further, on the front side of the upper plate 17, there is provided a break button 500 for setting that the card inserted in the card return unit 300 cannot be returned when the player takes a break. The break button 500 will be described later, but when the password is not set by the player operating (pressing) the break button 500, a password setting screen for setting the password (FIG. 5A). Is displayed to inform the player to set a password. Then, when the password is set, even if the return button 42 is pressed, the operation is set to the invalid state (invalidation). When the password has already been set (when the break button 500 is pressed to set the password, etc.), the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) is displayed and set. The return button 42 can be set valid (validated) by entering the password.

  In the present embodiment, when the break button 500 is operated, the return button 42 is invalidated by setting the password. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the break button 500 is pressed, , The return button 42 is forcibly disabled, a break flag indicating that a break is in progress is provided, the break flag is set to ON, and the pachinko machine 10 returns only when the break flag is ON. A return switch that can activate the button 42 may be provided at a position where the game store can operate. With such a configuration, the player can immediately go to a break by operating the break button 500, which facilitates the operation.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated, the ball lending button 43 may be configured to be invalidated, or the launch of the game ball may be prohibited. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem such as illegally lending a ball during a break or playing a game without permission by another person.

  Although the password is set by operating the break button 500, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return button 42 may be invalidated immediately by operating the break button 500. With such a configuration, a method of providing a break release button that can be operated by a clerk of the game shop on the back side of the game machine, inside the front frame 14 or the like, and calling the clerk to cancel the break can be considered.

  When the return button 42 is invalidated by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is invalidated until the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized or the set password is input. However, the upper limit time may be set for the time when the return button 42 is invalidated. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the password is set unnecessarily and the return button 42 remains disabled for a long time.

  In addition, when the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated (for example, the third symbol display device 81 indicates “during break! The character "!" Is displayed). Further, the time when the return button 42 is invalidated may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily informed to the clerk of the gaming shop that the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is disabled. Therefore, even if there is a pachinko machine 10 in which the return button 42 has been invalidated and left for a long time, the clerk of the gaming shop can detect it early and release the invalidation of the return button 42. Then, the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 can be collected and managed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in a non-playing state for a long time and causing damage to the gaming shop side. In addition, if a preset time is set in advance and the return button 42 is invalidated for the preset time or longer, the fact that the return button 42 has been invalidated for the preset time or longer is notified. You may comprise. With this configuration, the gaming shop side can identify the pachinko machine 10 that has been disabled for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the return button 42 from being left invalidated.

  A human sensor 400 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17. The human sensor 400 is a sensor for detecting a player playing the pachinko machine 10 by using infrared rays. The human sensor 400 is turned on when a player is detected and outputs a signal to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the human sensor 400 is turned off and a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the text "Card is in!" Is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and voice output is performed. The device 226 outputs a voice message "card is inserted" (S1814 in FIG. 32).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card when the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300. Although not shown, this notification mode is stopped (erased) when the break button 500 is operated.

  In the present embodiment, the card notification process is executed immediately after the human sensor 400 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the human sensor is turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). You may comprise so that it may notify you, after progressing. With such a configuration, even if the player moves the body in front of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shakes the body to the left or right) to temporarily turn off the motion sensor 400, the player can immediately turn it off. It is possible to prevent the notification from being executed, and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  Further, on the left side of the front frame 14 in front view, an insertion notification lamp 310 is provided to notify that a card is inserted in a card reading unit 300, which will be described later. The insertion notification lamp 310 has a triangular shape, and the apex of the triangle is arranged so as to point toward the card reading unit 300 so as to point to the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 300 is controlled so as to be turned on when a prepaid-type dedicated card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 310 is composed of a red LED and has a higher brightness than other light emitting means (LED).

  In this way, when the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the insertion notification lamp 310 lights up, so that the player can prevent forgetting that the card is being inserted into the card reading unit 300. . Further, since the light is turned on with a higher brightness than the other light emitting means, even when a game is being played, it is not noticed that the insertion notification lamp 310 is turned on by turning on the other light emitting means. You can prevent problems.

  In the present embodiment, the card reading unit 300 has been described as being limited to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card reading unit 300 may be disposed on either the left or right side. By providing 310 on the front view right side of the front frame 14 and providing a changeover switch or the like on the pachinko machine 10, the direction in which the card reading unit 300 is arranged is set on the pachinko machine 10 by the changeover switch, and the insertion notification is turned on. The lamp 310 may be configured to be set. Further, by providing a sensor or the like for detecting the card reading unit 300 on the side surface of the gaming machine, the direction of the card reading unit 300 in which the pachinko machine 10 is arranged may be automatically detected and set. Good. With such a configuration, even if the card reading units 300 are arranged in various ways, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the card is inserted, and forget that the player has inserted the card. It is possible to prevent it.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a balance indicator 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card reading unit 300 (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is lent according to the operation. Be seen. Specifically, the balance indicator 41 is an area where the balance information of the card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 43 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card. . The return button 42 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  The card reading unit 300 is for reading the data of the balance amount stored in the card, and a card insertion port 306 for inserting a card having a valuable value similar to money at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction thereof. Is provided. A card available lamp 301 is provided above the card insertion slot 306 and above the card reading unit 300. For example, the card available lamp 301 can insert a card into the card insertion slot 306. When the card cannot be inserted into the card insertion slot 306, it is turned off. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the card reading unit 300 can be used by visually recognizing the card available lamp 301.

  An amount setting button for setting the loan amount based on the balance amount data recorded on the card, which is located between the card insertion slot 306 and the card availability lamp 301 and above the card reading unit 300. 302 is provided, and the loan amount can be set to 100 yen, 200 yen, 300 yen or 500 yen by pressing the amount setting button 302. Note that the loan amount is usually set to 500 yen, and the payout of a ball P corresponding to a 100-yen rental ball (for example, 25 balls) is made five times (for example, 125 balls).

  A fraction display button 303 is arranged below the amount setting button 302. The fraction display button 303 is pressed to display the fraction on the balance display 41 when the balance amount stored in the card is less than the minimum lending amount (for example, 100 yen). .

  Below the fraction display button 303, a pair of upper and lower connecting stand direction display lamps 304 formed in a substantially triangular shape are arranged. The pair of connecting stand direction display lamps 304 are for indicating the arrangement (arrangement) direction of the pachinko machine 10 to which the card reading unit 300 is connected, and each has one LED built therein. ing. Therefore, for example, when the card reading unit 300 is connected to a pachinko machine (not shown) arranged side by side on the left side, the upper LED is turned on. A card insertion lamp 305 made up of one LED is disposed below the connecting table direction display lamp 304. The card insertion lamp 305 has a card inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The light is turned on when the card is present, and turned off when the card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card available lamp 301 and the connecting stand direction display lamp 304 are turned on when the power of the card reading unit 300 is turned on.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) that operates. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, so that the operation handle 51 rotates. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the operation amount, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  A ball-pulling button (ball-pulling lever) 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball-pulling button (ball-pulling lever) 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left against the urging force, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. After opening, the ball spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball-removing button (ball-removing lever) 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. .

  The ball-out button 52 is provided with a ball-out button sensor 52a (see FIG. 8) for detecting whether the slide operation has been performed. This ball removal button sensor 52a is composed of a limit sensor, and when the ball removal button 52 is operated to open the bottom opening of the lower plate 50, the ball removal button 52 is turned on. It is configured. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the player has operated the ball removal button 52. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol that is performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the big hit, a game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered spheres is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. And is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types. In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from after the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Further, in the case of "big hit B", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) from the end of the big hit to the next big hit.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called high probability state of the special symbol (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (15R It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to jackpot. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal symbol" (time saving of ordinary symbol) refers to a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol". Show.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. After that, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, when the big hit type is "big hit B", it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and shifts to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and if the big hit type is "big hit A", the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Until it is done, it will be in a high probability state of normal design.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an opening display mode for notifying the player of the start of the big hit game when the big hit game is started. Although details will be described later, when a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 and a jackpot game is started, the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 as shown in FIG. 4A. The characters "Please press the card return button!", Which is a display mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42 so that the card is ejected and returned to the player, is displayed.

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player, so that there is no need for a lending ball for a while, and during that time, the player reads the card reading unit 300. It is possible to prevent forgetting that the card is inserted in the card and forgetting to return the card after the game is over. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as forgetting to return the card, the card being stolen or lost. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball lending button 43 when he / she does not need the ball to unnecessarily reduce the card balance.

  The third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". The main symbol is composed of three columns of left, middle, and right, and when three stop symbols are displayed in the center with the same number, it indicates that the lottery result was a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed on the even-numbered grid of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the fact that the big hit A is won is notified, and "1, 3, 5, 7" is displayed. , 9 ”are arranged in an odd number, the player is informed that the jackpot B has been won.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the second symbol holding lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is composed of four LEDs. In the second design holding lamp 84, one LED is turned on per one holding ball number, and the number of holding balls is notified according to the number of lighting of the LED. That is, when one LED is turned on in the second symbol holding lamp 84, it means that the number of holding balls is one, and when four LEDs are turned on, the number of holding balls is four. Indicates that there is. Further, when the LED is not lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. The number may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, not only the second symbol holding lamp 84, but also the third symbol display device 81 may display a holding display symbol (for example, "●") to display the number of holdings.

  Further, the LED of the second symbol holding lamp 84 is configured to be able to switch and display both blue and red. Although it will be described in detail later, normally, it is lit in blue to inform the player of the number of holdings, but by holding the card in the card reading unit 300 and operating the return button 42, it is put on hold. When there is a hold for a lottery game that is a big win among the lottery games that are being held (as a result of prefetching, there is a big jackpot hold), the LED corresponding to the hold is changed from blue to red and lit and displayed.

  With such a configuration, by operating the return button 43, it is possible to obtain a bonus of the game (you can know the lottery result before the change of the third symbol), and the player can always return the button 43. It is possible to be aware of operating (pressing). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the state in which the card remains in the card reading unit 300, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  Further, the second pattern holding lamp 84 is changed from blue to red to notify the result of the prefetching, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by operating the return button 42, the result of the prefetching is hit within the pending state. If a hold is stored, the notification may be given again to insert the returned card. With this configuration, for example, when a special symbol hits, the winning opening having the blade opens, and when a special winning opening (V winning opening) provided inside the winning opening is won, the player In the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to be given a special bonus game, when a special symbol hits, a game ball is required, so prepare a game ball for the special symbol hit (ball lending Can be operated). Therefore, by operating the return button 42, an advantageous state can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus of the game obtained by operating the return button 43 is to notify the result of the lottery although it is withheld before the variable display of the third symbol is started, but it is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a two-dimensional image such as a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the two-dimensional code is read by a mobile phone or the like, so that the pachinko machine 10 It may be a privilege that allows the user to obtain the character used in, the voice of the character, and the like. Further, by operating the return button 43, it may be a privilege that can obtain information on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the number of jackpots and the balance of the day (balance)). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances that the player operates the return button 43, and prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and goes home.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a card return variation mode that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol starts the variable display and the reach state in which the left and right main symbols stop at the same symbol is reached, the player is instructed to operate the return button 42 by pressing the "card return button! Character is displayed. After that, when the player operates the return button 42 within a predetermined time, the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing, and "777", which is the display mode of the third symbol showing the big hit, is stopped and displayed. It

  With this configuration, if the player is inserting a card into the card reading unit 300, by operating the return button 42, the determination result of the lottery game is displayed at the operation timing. Therefore, the player himself can have a feeling that he has stopped the jackpot pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card by operating the return button 42 with special expectations. Also, in the case of a variation mode that is a jackpot, by determining and executing the card return variation mode, it is not necessary to lend the ball for the time being, so be sure to remove the card from the player. Can be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a password setting screen and an input screen for setting invalidation and activation of the return button 42 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, and a special symbol (third symbol) is changed for a predetermined time or more in a state where the password is not set yet. If the stopped state (the state where the game ball does not enter the first entrance 64) continues for (30 seconds or more in the present embodiment), the password setting screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the password setting screen displays the characters "please set password" to inform the player that the password setting screen is displayed. Then, the characters "1 to 5" for setting a 4-digit password are displayed below each character for each digit. A cursor indicating the selected digit is displayed in a triangular display mode, and the digit displayed on the left side of the cursor indicates the digit whose number can be selected at present. Then, the background color of the number indicated by the cursor is displayed in a color different from the other background colors (for example, the normal background color is blue, and a white background is selected). By operating the frame button 22, the cursor moves up, down, left, and right, and the player operates the enter button 22a by designating an arbitrary 4-digit password, and the designated password is stored in the pachinko machine 10 ( Is set).

  Further, in FIG. 5B, when the password for invalidating the return button 42 is already set, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time or more (5 seconds or more in the present embodiment). If not, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character string "Please enter the password" is displayed to inform that the password input screen is displayed, and the password input screen is displayed as in the password setting screen.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a card insertion notification display mode for notifying that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, this card insertion notification display mode is irrelevant to the state of the gaming machine (state of whether a game is being played) at regular intervals on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed without In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to be displayed for 5 seconds every 30 seconds.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a card balance display mode for notifying the player of the card balance displayed after the card insertion notification display mode is displayed. The amount information is displayed based on the card balance. This card balance display mode is displayed for 5 seconds after the card insertion notification display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed. Then, 30 seconds later, the card insertion notification display mode is displayed and then displayed again. That is, the card balance display mode is also displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds. In addition, when the balance display mode is equal to or more than a predetermined amount (3000 yen or more in the present embodiment), the display mode normally displayed in blue is displayed in red.

  With such a configuration, only when the amount of money is more than a certain amount, the color is displayed in a conspicuous character, so that the player can be made aware that a card with a large amount of remaining balance is inserted. Therefore, the remaining balance can be easily known. Further, since the balance display is not always displayed in a prominent color, it is possible to prevent the balance display from interfering with the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are configured to be displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a cycle of 60 seconds, for example, and is appropriately set. It may be a cycle. In addition, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are not displayed in the game state (for example, a state in which the variable display mode of a specific special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, etc.). By the insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the balance display mode is configured to change the character color when the card balance is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character size (font) may be changed or the character may be changed. The display may blink.

  In the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the special symbol is drawn by using it as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol display device 37) Variable display of (pattern) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command to the voice lamp controller 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device. The variable display of the third symbol is performed according to the variable display of 37.

  When the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds) When elapses, the display switches to the medium speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect is ended, and subsequently, the big hit effect is started. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are not aligned is displayed, the variable effect is finished, and if there is a pending start prize, While the next special symbol is drawn, the next variation effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods, a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and the game value (a high probability state of the special symbol or a high probability state of the normal symbol) given to the player after the jackpot is over. ) Is notified to the player, or it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol that has been held (performing a finalized effect display).

  In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize hole in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, the electric symbols are usually a big hit and the electric accessory is opened, and the balls enter the first prize. The number of prize balls increases as the ball 64 easily enters. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the ordinary symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a during opening of the opening 65a. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. The command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction. Further, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are configured to bidirectionally transmit commands.

  In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  For the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of the special symbol and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, special initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, A fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection is used. In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is usually used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

  The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a jackpot of the special symbol is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (FIG. 10A), which will be described later and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, a display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Aspect becomes a special big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Each data stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the ROM 202, the big hit random number table 202a, the big hit type table 202b, the normal symbol random number table 202c, the big hit variation pattern table 202d, the deviation pattern table 202e, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the normal symbol stop type command 202g are provided respectively.

  The big hit random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 10B, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the hit counter value for performing the hit determination. It is a set data table. When the probability of a special symbol is low (normal game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to one, and specifically, "7" is a hit counter that is determined to be a big hit. It is set to a value. In addition, at the time of high probability of special symbols (probability variation game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to 10, and specifically, "0 to 9" is determined to be a big hit. The hit counter value is set.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the jackpot type table 202b is a hit counter in which the hit of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64 is a hit. When the value is a value, it is a data table for determining whether the type of the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance 64, if the value of the special bonus type counter CS2 acquired is any of "0-49", the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot) It is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired special winning type counter CS2 is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R probability variation jackpot) is determined.

  The normal symbol per random number table 202c is, as shown in FIG. 10 (d), the normal per random number counter C4 acquired when the game ball passes through the second entrance 67, and the hit counter value for making a win / fail judgment. Is a data table in which is set. When the probability of the normal symbol is low (normal game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, which is determined as a hit, is set to "5 to 28". In addition, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (time saving game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is set to "5 to 204".

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d is a variation pattern that is selected as the variation display mode of the third symbol when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a jackpot, and a plurality of jackpots based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. From the variable display mode for jackpot (dynamic display mode for jackpot), one variable display mode for jackpot is determined.

  The variation pattern table for detachment 202e is data in which a plurality of detachment variation patterns (displacement dynamic display aspect) selected as the variation display mode of the third symbol are stored when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out. It's a table. The deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  By the stop type selection counter C3, the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach out" (e.g. 98, 99) and "reach other than out-of-front / outer reach" (e.g. in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after "reach" occurs and "reach does not occur" Three stop (effect) patterns of "off" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

In the deviation variation pattern table 202e, a plurality of variation patterns are set for the variation mode determined by the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns and acquired. One deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The variation pattern table 202f of the ordinary symbol is a data table in which the variation pattern for the low probability of the ordinary symbol and the variation pattern for the high probability of the ordinary symbol, and the variation pattern of deviation are stored respectively. The variation pattern for the low probability of the normal symbol is the variation pattern of the hit variation and the deviation pattern, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. In addition, the variation pattern for the high probability of the normal symbol, both the variation pattern of the hit variation and the variation pattern of the deviation, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. As for the variation pattern of this ordinary symbol, a variation pattern of one type is set for both the low probability and high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202g is for setting whether to turn on either "○" or "x" as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. It is a command. If the result of the judgment whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is a hit, the stop type command 202g of the normal symbol for turning on "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is set. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the normal symbol is out, the stop type command 202g of the regular symbol for turning on the "x" indicating the disengagement of the regular symbol is set.

  In addition, when the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol, if the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, the first entrance 64 is "0.2 seconds × It will be opened only once. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, when the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very long as “3 seconds → 30 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the release of the first entrance 64 Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, an hour / hour counter 203f, a card balance storage area 203g, and another storage area 203h.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a special winning random number counter C1, The respective values of the special winning type counter C2 and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, a hit, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the result of winning / deciding from the prize information command and stores it as the prize information in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 233.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is mainly reserved for the special symbol to the player in the pending change processing (FIG. 30, S1608) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. It is used to notify if there is a big jackpot on hold. Further, in the present embodiment, it is used to notify whether or not there is a jackpot that is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variation patterns and stop types as prize information are also stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It may be stored and notified about the holding of the special symbol to be the reach, or may be appropriately used for other effects and the like.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for hitting a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 of FIG. 16).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 16, see S405 of FIG. 18). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a variable display holding ball held by the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and holds the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 turns on the holding sphere number pattern of the second symbol display device 83 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 19).

  When the sphere passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, ordinary random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 on either the left or right, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. Not performed (S603: No in FIG. 20).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). This probability variation flag 203e, in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot type is a jackpot. If it is determined to be B, it is set to ON (S213 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, after that, when it is determined that the jackpot type A, it is set to OFF (S214 in FIG. 16). The probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Further, it is configured to be backed up in the event of power failure.

  The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. In this time saving counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, the main control device 110 performs a special symbol lottery, and when the special symbol determined to be a big hit is stopped and displayed, the big hit type is a big hit A. If so, 100 is set to the hour / hour counter (S214 in FIG. 16).

  The card balance storage area 203g is a storage area in which information on the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is stored based on the card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The card balance storage area 203g stores an initial value of 0 when the RAM 203 is initialized. If there is a difference between the balance information indicated by the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicated by the received card extraction signal and the value of the card balance storage area 203g, the value of the card balance storage area 203g is based on the received card extraction signal. It is updated with the value of the balance information.

  It should be noted that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when the card balance storage area 203g stores balance information with a value greater than 0. Further, the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicating that the card is not inserted (in the present embodiment, the first LED 41a is "-", the second LED 41b is "-", and the third LED 41c is "-". When a card extraction signal indicating "displayed" is received, an initial value 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g.

  The other storage area 203h is a storage area in which various other counter values necessary when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 and other flags are appropriately stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the extraction signal line of the balance indicator 41, the card reading unit 300, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the balance indicator 41 for displaying the card balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is configured by arranging three 7-segment LEDs in a line, and the balance of the balance of 40 It is a 7-segment LED indicating the rank, a first LED 41a arranged on the left side, a 7-segment LED indicating the thousands position of the balance, a second LED 41b arranged in the center, and a 7-segment LED indicating the hundreds position of the balance. The third LED 41c is arranged on the right side. Each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments, that is, segment Ma to segment Mg, and one signal line is connected to each segment so that each segment can be turned on independently. .

  The signal line connecting the card reading unit 300 and the balance indicator 41 is provided with extraction means (LDa to LDc) (phototransistors in this embodiment) for extracting signals for lighting the respective segments. Each signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signal input to the input / output port 215 to the main control device 110 to control the signal of the same content as it is at every execution cycle (every 2 ms in this embodiment). Is configured to.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the main control device 110 with the same content as that input to the input / output port 215. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may be configured to generate a dedicated command based on each input signal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, seven signal lines are connected from the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the payout control device 202, and a total of 21 signal lines are connected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an IC to which the signal output from each of the extracting means (LDa to LDc) is input is provided, and the seven signal lines commonly output from each IC are connected to the payout control device 111. The payout control device 111 is provided with a chip selector for designating the IC, and three signal lines connected to each IC from the chip selector are connected. Therefore, 10 signal lines are connected from the IC to the payout control device 111, and the number of signal lines connected to the payout control device 111 can be reduced. The IC may be provided on the relay board or the like, or may be provided on the board of the balance indicator 41. When the balance indicator 41 is provided on the substrate, it can be connected to each IC by a printed line, and the labor of connecting a harness can be reduced. Further, an IC may be provided in the payout control device 202 to reduce the number of harnesses between the main control device 201 and the payout control device 111.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is a condition that the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). Then, the firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). The display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display, is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the password is input and set, and the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Alternatively, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a control program and the like necessary for the MPU 221 to execute control, and various data. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a sub card information storage area 223e, and a return. At least a lock flag 223f, a handle counter 223g, a password storage area 223h, a subordinate return button flag 223i, a lottery counter 223j, a card return effect flag 223k, a customer waiting counter 223m, and another storage area 223n are provided. ing.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start winning, from the respective values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning, Various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the various predicted information is mainly The control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, the result of winning / decision determination is extracted as prize information from the various information notified by the prize information command, and the prize information is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Memorized in. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 28). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to light the holding ball number symbol in the second symbol display device 83.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 29). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1616 in FIG. 29).

  The slave card information storage area 223e receives the card information command (see S704 in FIG. 21) output by the main control device 110 based on the signal extracted by the extracting means (LDa to LDc). A storage area for storing the card balance indicated by the card information command. This sub card information storage area 223e is set to 0 when the gaming machine is initialized.

  The return lock flag 223f is a flag, which will be described later, indicating whether the return button 42 is set to be valid (whether it is valid) or not (is invalid). When the card is not returned from the card reading unit 300 even if the return button 42 is invalidated and the player operates the return button 42, the return lock flag 223f is set to ON. On the other hand, when the return button 42 is activated and the player operates the return button 42 to return the card from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the return button 42 is activated and set, and the return lock flag 223f is turned off.

  The handle counter 223g is a counter that is incremented (updated) by 1 when the player releases the operation handle 51 (the handle sensor 51a is off) (see S1809 in FIG. 32). The value of the handle counter 223g is reset to 0 when the handle sensor 51a is turned on. That is, the handle count 223g is a counter for measuring the time when the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, and the value of the counter can determine the time when the player has released his / her hand from the operation handle 51. it can.

  The password storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a password for switching invalidation and activation of the return button 42. Although details will be described later, a 4-digit password arbitrarily determined by the player operating the frame button 22 on the password setting screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored (see S2023 in FIG. 35). ). On the other hand, when the password is stored in the password storage area 223h, the same as the password stored in the password storage area 223g by operating the frame button 22 on the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the password is input, it is reset to 0 (S2029 in FIG. 35). The password storage area 223h stores 0, which is the initial state when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. In addition, when power is cut off, it is backed up.

  In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is configured to be reset. Therefore, if the player forgets the password, the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by calling the clerk of the game store. The card can be returned by being converted. In this embodiment, the password is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, but the invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated password initialization switch may be provided. The password initialization switch can be prevented from being illegally initialized by being configured so that it can be initialized by operating the key with the key on the game shop side. Further, by providing the dedicated initialization switch, it is not necessary to initialize the pachinko machine 10, and the password can be initialized without initializing the gaming state and the like. Therefore, the password can be initialized and the return button 42 can be validated even in a state where it is disadvantageous to the player if the pachinko machine 10 during the big hit or the probability variation game is initialized. Therefore, the card can be returned to the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  The subordinate return button flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON when the return button 42 is operated in a state where the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is enabled (FIG. 31). S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 has not been operated, it is set to off (see S1710 in FIG. 31). With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether the player has operated the return button 42 to return the card inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  When the variation display mode of the special symbol received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot variation display mode, the lottery counter 223j has a card inserted and the return button 42 is activated, It is a counter value for determining whether to execute the return variable display mode. The lottery counter 223j is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and if the acquired counter value is any of “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a win and the return variation display mode is set. To be done. The lottery counter 223j is incremented by 1 each time the command output process (FIG. 26, S1302) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The value is updated to 0. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the lottery counter 223j is set to 0 which is an initial value.

  Although the details will be described later, the return variation display mode is, as shown in FIG. 4B, a variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a variation output from the main control device 110. This is a variable display mode dedicated to changing the display mode of the variable display mode by allowing the player to operate the return button 42 in the middle of the variable display mode, which is different from the variable display mode indicated by the pattern command. This return fluctuation display mode is set with the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation display mode indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110.

  The card return effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the return variation display mode is determined. The card return effect flag 223k is set to ON when the return variation display mode is determined (S1613 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the variation display mode indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not the jackpot variation display mode. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The customer waiting counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the lottery game is not executed). The customer waiting counter 223m is updated one by one based on the fact that the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S1402 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the initial value 0 is reset. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The other storage area 223n is a storage area in which various other data necessary for the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various controls of the pachinko machine 10 and other various flags are stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  To the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, a return signal output from the return button 42 for returning the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 provided on the front frame 14 to the card reading unit is sent. The return extraction signal extracted by the return extraction means 42a is input.

  Further, the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 also receives signals from the ball removal button sensor 52a that detects the operation of the ball removal button 52, the motion sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14, and the break button 500, respectively. It is configured to be input.

  The electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 connect a connector composed of a plurality of signal lines from the card reading unit 300 to a card reading unit connection board (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Electrically connected by. As shown in FIG. 11, the power supply of the signal necessary for exchanging between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 is the voltage (DC24V) generated by the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is supplied to the card reading unit 300 side. The supplied voltage is input to the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 to generate a DC18V voltage (VL) from the input DC24V and output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the card reading unit connection board. To do.

  The DC 18V voltage (VL) output from the card reading unit 300 is used as a drive voltage for the ball lending LED 40a, the balance indicator 41, and a phototransistor for extracting a signal in the pachinko machine 10, and It is also used as a signal for the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the connection with the card reading unit 300. Further, although not shown, the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 generates each voltage necessary for the operation of each unit of the card reading unit 300 in addition to the voltage (VL) of DC18V, and each unit of the card reading unit 300. Supply to.

  Although not shown, the card reading unit 300 is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. This MPU has a ROM, which is a non-volatile memory that stores various control programs executed by the MPU, fixed value data, and the like, and various data temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. In addition to a RAM for temporarily storing, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. A bus line composed of an address bus and a data bus is connected to this MPU, and this bus line is connected to the input / output port N1 shown in FIG. In addition to this bus line, a card available lamp 301, an amount setting button 302, a fraction display button 303, a connection direction display lamp 304, a card insertion lamp 306, and a card insertion slot 306 are inserted into the input / output port N1. A reader / writer (not shown) for reading a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) is connected.

  This reader / writer is provided with a magnetic head and the like having a reader function for reading money amount information and the like from a card inserted in the card insertion 306 and a writer function for writing money amount information of the balance amount after use to the card. ing. When the reader / writer reads out the amount information of the balance amount of the inserted card, it is determined that the card is being inserted. Further, when the amount of the balance newly written in the card by the reader / writer becomes “0”, the card inserted from the card insertion slot 306 is forcibly forced from the card insertion slot 306 by the actuator (not shown). Is discharged.

  The card reading unit 300 outputs a signal for turning on each of the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 to three phototransistors S1 and seven phototransistors S2. Is output to the pachinko machine 1 side at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1 ms). For example, when the ball lending button 43 is operated and a ball for 500 yen is paid out, when the payout is completed, the signal is switched so that the balance display is turned on with a display subtracting 500 yen.

  The three phototransistors S1 are provided corresponding to the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, respectively. In addition, the seven phototransistors S2 are provided corresponding to the respective seven segments Ma to Mg that form the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c.

  For example, if the phototransistor S2 corresponding to the segment Md is turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the hundreds first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the LED of the segment Md of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on. Lights up. That is, "-" is displayed on the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 (see FIG. 7). Further, if all the seven phototransistors S2 are turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the tenth second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the seven segments Ma of the second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 are displayed. All Mg lights up, and "8" is displayed on the second LED 41b.

  FIG. 12 shows that the signals output from the card reading unit 300 in order to turn on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 in FIG. 11 are extracted by the phototransistors LDa to LDc (extracting means). It is a block diagram showing a configuration of (branching) and outputting to an input / output port 215 of a payout control device 111. The phototransistors LDa to LDc used here are provided with a resistor on the collector side, and prevent a problem that a current flowing from the collector to the emitter becomes too large and short-circuits. The emitter side is connected to the ground. Further, in the present embodiment, the emitter side is connected to the ground, and the current is drawn to activate the signal. However, as shown as a modified example of the phototransistors LDa to LDc in FIG. A signal may be activated by applying a current to the device 111 side.

  The phototransistor LDa is for extracting (branching) the signals for lighting the respective segments Ma to Mg of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 14, and corresponding to each of the seven segments Ma to Mg. There are 7 in total, one for each.

  The phototransistor LDb corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the second LED 41b, and the phototransistor LDc corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the third LED 41c, respectively, like the phototransistor LDa, in total. Seven are provided each. The phototransistors LDa to LDc are respectively provided on the LED substrates on which the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 are provided. In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the extraction means, but the extraction means is not particularly limited thereto, and any other device capable of extracting a signal may be used. For example, it may be one that detects whether a current flows due to a change in the magnetic field from the outside of the signal line, or one that directly branches the signal electrically and detects it.

  In this way, the phototransistors LDa to LDc extract (branch) the lighting signals of the respective segments Ma to Mg, and the phototransistors LDa to LDc transmit signals by light, so that there is no electrical wiring. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized electrical signal from being output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage caused by a fraudulent act made by illegally changing the electrical wiring. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 1 are connected (signal transmission / reception) via a photodiode, so that the card reading unit 300 does not transmit / receive an illegal electrical signal. Moreover, since the pachinko machine 10 side receives the signal output from the card reading unit 300 by using the photodiode, the photodiode of the phototransistor cannot be turned on from the pachinko machine 10 side, and the pachinko machine 10 side. It is difficult to output an illegal signal from the side to the card reading unit 300 side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an illegal signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In the card reading unit 300, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, power is supplied from the pachinko machine 10 to the power supply circuit on the card unit 300 side via the power supply device 115, and each device of the card reading unit 300 is supplied. The power circuit supplies the required power. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit, the card reading unit 300 starts up based on a predetermined program, and when the normal control becomes possible, the player is informed that the card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card available lamp 300 for notification is turned on. When a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306, the card is read to see if it is normal. If it is normal, the card insertion lamp 305 is turned on and the card based on the balance inserted in the balance indicator 41 is read. Controlled to display balance. The lighting control of the balance indicator 41 is as described above. Further, the operation of the ball lending button 43 and the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be acceptable (a state in which the received signal is judged to be valid).

  From the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, a unit preparation signal BO for indicating to the pachinko machine 10 that the card reading unit 300 is in the ball lending state, from the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, In order to turn on the lending instruction completion signal YQ, which is a signal indicating the ball lending execution request and the ball lending execution instruction, and the ball lending possible LED 40a provided to the player, which is provided in the front frame 14, and which notifies the player that the ball lending is possible. The ball lending lighting signal RO and the like are output to the pachinko machine 10.

  Also, from the pachinko machine 10 to the card reading unit 300, a pachinko machine side preparation signal PO indicating to the card reading unit 300 that the pachinko machine 10 is in a ball lending state, and a lending output from the card reading unit 300 A ball lending completion signal ED indicating a response to the ball lending execution request of the instruction completion signal YQ and the end of the ball lending operation (end of ball lending payout) performed in response to the ball lending execution instruction of the lending instruction completion signal YQ, The card return signal HS output based on the operation of the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14, and the ball lending operation signal KS output based on the operation of the ball lending button 43 There is.

  The electrical connection between the card return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. On the pachinko machine 10 side, the return extraction means 42a (phototransistor) extracts the return extraction signal from the card return signal HS, and inputs the extracted signal to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Has become. Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, a photo MOS relay is provided as a changeover switch (switching means) 42b on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a, and a signal output from the voice lamp control device 113 The signal line between the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is configured to be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state. In the present embodiment, the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 to the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b is active, the return button 42 is activated, that is, the signal line is connected. In the inactive state, the return button 42 is disabled, that is, the signal line is set to the disconnected state.

  Between the return extraction means (phototransistor) 42a and the changeover switch (photoMOS relay) 42b, the voice lamp control device 113 activates the card return signal HS even when the return button 42 is not operated. It is configured to receive the forced return signal. The return extraction means 42a and the changeover switch b are provided on the same board, and are connected to the return button 42 and provided on the front frame 14.

  In this way, the card return signal HS output from the return button 42 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be extractable, so it is possible to determine whether the player has operated the card return button 42. In addition, since the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 can be switched between the disconnected state and the connected state by the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 by the changeover switch 42b, the return button 42 is disabled. It can be set by switching between activation and activation. Therefore, even if a player is playing a game with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300, by disabling the card return button 42, the problem that the card is stolen can be prevented.

  Further, the return button 42 is electrically and directly connected to the card reading unit 300 provided outside the pachinko machine 10, but the control device of the pachinko machine 10 of the return button 42 (in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113). ) Is connected via a phototransistor, and is not directly electrically connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized electric signal from being output from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to the control device of the pachinko machine 10 via the return button 42. Further, the changeover switch 42b is also constituted by a photo MOS relay, thereby preventing direct electrical connection with the control device to the outside. Also, by using the phototransistor, it is possible to transmit a one-way signal that is output from the side that lights the diode of the phototransistor. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being output to one side.

  In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the return extraction unit 42a, but the return extraction unit 42a is not limited to this, and any other unit may be used as long as it can detect ON / OFF of a signal. Further, although the photo-MOS relay is used as the changeover switch 42b in the embodiment, the changeover switch 42b is not limited to this and may be a relay or the like. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the return extraction signal is configured to be input to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other control boards such as the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 may be input. It may be configured to input.

  FIG. 14A is a block diagram simply showing the electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 1 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, whether a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, information about the card balance, a signal for turning on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 is extracted and paid out. It is configured to output to the control device 111. Instead, in Modification 1, the signal is output to main controller 110. Further, the control signal relating to the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is also output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether or not the ball lending is possible based on the control signal output from the payout control device 111, and outputs the pachinko-side preparation signal PO and the like to the card reading unit 300. ing. Further, when the MPU of the main control device 110 receives the control signal from the card reading unit 300, it outputs a signal corresponding to the signal to the payout control device 111.

  Further, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the balance information of the card. Then, based on the discriminated information, the same notification processing as in the first embodiment is executed. With this configuration, the card insertion information and the card balance information are directly input to the main control device 110, so that the control can be promptly performed.

  In the present embodiment, the control signal relating to the ball lending output by the card reading unit 300 is output to the main control device 110. Alternatively, only the signals output from the transistors LDa to LDc may be output to main controller 110. With this configuration, the ball lending control can be performed by the payout control device 111 regardless of an instruction from the main control device 110, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 2 of the first embodiment. In the second modification, a control signal regarding the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, and a signal extracted from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is a voice signal. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 directly receives the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates the card information based on the received signal. By performing the same notification as in the first embodiment, main controller 110 does not need to perform control for notification, and the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, since the control signal is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110, the signal output from the card reading unit 300 is not output to the main control device 110, and thus fraud can be reduced. .

  In the present embodiment, the control signal relating to the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the voice lamp control device 113, but the signal relating to the ball lending is the same as in the first embodiment. As the configuration for outputting to 111, only the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc may be output to the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to output a control signal relating to the ball lending to the payout control device 111, and the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 2D is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 3 of the first embodiment. In Modification 3, after the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output to the payout control device 111, the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output from the payout control device 111 to the audio lamp control device 113. This is different from the first embodiment in that the signal shown is output. With this configuration, since the signal output from the payout control device 111 is not output to the main control device 110, it is possible to suppress fraud with respect to the main control device 110. In addition, the signal indicating the signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is output to the voice lamp control device 113 without passing through the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the card information, and the first embodiment is performed. Since the notification similar to that of the embodiment is executed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, an enclosed pachinko machine (a pachinko machine in which a game ball is not paid out directly to a player and a game is carried out with the game ball stored in the game machine). Can also be used. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 extracts the card information of the card reading unit 300 and uses it not only for notification and presentation but also for outputting to a hall computer or a management computer is conceivable.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 using a card is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a prepaid medium in which money amount information (value of value) is stored. For example, a reading unit that uses a coin having a built-in IC chip, a stick, or the like, which is a (valuable value storage medium), can be used.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, by using the card reading unit 300, it is possible to use it for a slot gaming machine (rotating gaming machine) for lending medals. Is.

  Further, as another configuration, as will be described later in detail, an optical sensor for detecting the light amount of the 7-segment LED of the balance indicator 41 is provided in the frame body of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal of the optical sensor is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the card information may be notified by inputting into the. The balance information of the card information is stored in advance in correspondence with the amount of light quantity corresponding to the balance display, and the balance is determined based on the detected light quantity, or the light sensor is changed to an image recognition sensor to perform image recognition. Thus, the balance of the card may be detected by recognizing the balance display. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from outputting a signal for performing fraud via the card reading unit 300. Further, since the control can be executed based on the information actually displayed, more accurate notification can be performed. As for detecting the balance display, by detecting from the back side or the top side of the LED display, or from the surroundings, the sensor is not arranged on the front side, so that the visibility of the balance display of the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the first embodiment will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol (third symbol) in the third symbol display device 81. It is for controlling a variable display (fluctuation effect) and the like. Since this display control device 114 is already well known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

  Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (each 399 in the present embodiment). , 99, 99, 239), each of them is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. After the through-gate passage process is executed, a card process is executed (S108), then a firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110). Terminate the timer interrupt process. Note that the card process, which will be described in detail later, executes various processes for setting information of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. Further, the firing control process is performed on the condition that the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. , Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off the firing of a ball. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104), first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is in a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the special symbol, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether to be A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S211), and the jackpot type. If is a big hit A, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S213). Then, the big hit start of the special symbol is set (S215), and this processing is ended. When the big hit start of the special symbol is set by the process of S215, the big hit control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired ( S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the probability variation If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols.

  When the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, so the probability variation in-progress judgment execution flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the process proceeds to S304. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that are big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S305). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability one by one. As the random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value for these hits match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S304 or S305 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and when it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (bonus A, jackpot) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A (15R normal big hit, 100 times of shortening time), and is set in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is, it is determined to be a big hit B (15R probability variation big hit) (see FIG. 10C).

  In the process of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern (variation display mode) at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. For example, the variation patterns for disengagement are defined as "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", and "disconnection special reach". ing.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach, or complete outreach is set.

  Here, the stop type is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98 , 99 ”, the out-of-front / rear reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 by checking the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is set (S311). Next, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24, S1000). Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reservation number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to the special value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, for the various counters acquired in the process of S406, based on the gaming state at the start of variation (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state), the judgment result of the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern selected Look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol for predicting (S407).

  By the processing of S407, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the result of winning / deciding from the prize information command and stores the information as prize information in the corresponding area of the prize information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of fluctuation display holdings in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S509). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the random symbol per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary is compared with the random number value stored in the random table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low probability. Based on the random symbol per regular symbol for time, the lottery result of whether or not the regular symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10D).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the first entrance opening The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds and the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops in the second symbol display device 83. The display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) in the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the normal symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and the present process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the card processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this card processing (S108). This card process (S108) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is generated based on the extraction signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) output from the payout control device 111. This is a process for determining the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 from the card extraction signal and notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the determined information.

  In the card process (FIG. 21, S108), first, based on the card extraction signal output by the payout control device 111 received in the process of S1003 of the main process (S1000 of FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, The display information of the balance indicator 41 is acquired (analyzed) (S701). It is determined whether there is a change in the card balance based on the value stored in the card balance storage area 203g and the display information acquired in the processing of S701 (S702). When it is determined that the card balance has changed (S702: Yes), the balance information based on the acquired display information is stored (updated) in the card balance storage area 203g (S703). A card information command based on the card balance information stored in the card balance storage area 203g is generated (S704). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no change in the card balance (S702: No), this process ends.

  The card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111 is an 8-bit signal formed of eight signal lines and input to the input / output port of the main control device 110. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 discriminates the input card extraction signal composed of 8 bits to discriminate the display information of the balance indicator 41. The card information command generated by the main controller 110 is composed of a 2-byte command, the upper byte is composed of a command indicating the type of command (it is a command indicating the card balance), and the lower byte is composed of It is composed of a command indicating the card balance.

  Regarding the card extraction signal, seven signal lines are respectively input from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, but are output to the main control device 110. The card extraction signal is composed of an 8-bit signal. This is because when the balance display unit 41 displays an error indicating the upper 1 bit, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 outputs the error by setting the bit to ON and outputting the card. It is configured so that it can be easily identified that it is an extracted signal. The signals extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc are set in the other 7 bits. That is, the total number of signal lines connected from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the payout control device 111 is 21, and the number of card extraction signals input from the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is 8. Signal line. The payout control device 111 can identify the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c based on the signals input from the extraction units LDa to LDc, respectively, with the remaining 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit, and the lighting mode of each segment. Generate a distinguishable signal. For example, the light emission mode of each LED is a number 0-9 and a light emission mode indicating an error display (for example, "A") and "-" indicating that a card is not inserted. 2 bits are used to indicate the type of LED (one of the first LED 41a to the third LED 41c), and the remaining 5 bits are used to form a signal corresponding to the light emission mode of the segment. Also, as described above, the upper 1 bit is set to ON when the light emission mode indicates an error.

  In the present embodiment, although omitted, in the card processing, when the card extraction signal indicating that the display indicating the error is displayed on the balance display 41 is received, the signal indicating the error is output to the hall computer externally. It is configured to output via a terminal (not shown). Further, the type of error display displayed on the balance display 41 may be determined and an error signal corresponding to the error type may be output to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal. With such a configuration, if the player attempts to lend a ball using a counterfeit bill, for example, the card reading unit 300 can display an error display corresponding to the error display on the balance display 41. The illegality can be detected and dealt with by the game store side without being noticed by the player.

  In this way, the signal for causing the card reading unit 300 to turn on the balance indicator 41 is extracted by the extracting means LDa to LDc, and the information is output to the main control device 110 via the payout control device 111 as a card extraction signal. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can determine whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the information. Further, when there is a card balance, the amount of money can be accurately determined and the voice lamp control device 113 can be accurately notified of the card balance. Further, even when the card balance changes, the card reading unit 300 newly displays the card balance on the balance display unit 41, so that the information based on the display is notified to the main controller 110. Based on the information, a new card information command can be generated and notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, based on the value of the card balance storage area 203g, in the special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 17, S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is configured to select the type of jackpot variation pattern or out-of-range variation pattern. May be. By configuring in this way, for example, when the card balance becomes small, it is easy to select a variation pattern of super reach with a high probability of being selected in the case of a hit such as out-of-order super reach, so that the hit may be close. By asking the player to expect, even after the card balance has been exhausted, more money can be added to allow the player to play the game. Also, when the card balance is large (more than the set value), it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is easily selected, so that the player can play games efficiently and the card balance is When the number becomes smaller (less than the set value), it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. The variation pattern that is easily selected may be configured to be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting a big hit while shortening the game time.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the controller is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) and the start winning process (see FIG. 18) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. In addition, the winning information command set in S408 of the starting winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the card extraction signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the card extraction signal based on the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) from the signal that the card reading unit 300 lights the balance display 41. In this embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) as they are to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal. Next, in the case of the special symbol big hit state, the big hit effect is executed, and the big hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a special symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the special symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variable display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the symbol display device 37. Start. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the special symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) ends, the first symbol display device 37. In the display mode set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) or the process of S309, the variable symbol that is being executed in the first symbol display device is displayed as the stop symbol (the first symbol). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed at 37.

  Next, a normal symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the normal symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the regular symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. . As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the normal symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). indicate.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the special time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number The initial value of the counter C1 and the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 25, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), the power-off process in S1318 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1318 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1320 of FIG. 26). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is a case where processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached through the processing of S1204 and S1206. If only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed from the start of the main process or the process of S1301 this time (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1311, the variable display setting processing of S1312, and the processing of updating the counter value in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1317 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, with reference to FIG. 27, as will be described later in detail, a process for executing the setting of the password setting screen and the password input screen for switching the activation and deactivation of the return button 42 is also executed. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not each operation button of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect or control process corresponding to the case. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 ends, the card effect control process is executed (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31, but when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and when the jackpot start is set, A process for determining whether the card is forcibly ejected or the return button 42 is operated is executed.

  When the process of S1313 is executed, a card notification process is executed to execute the process of preventing the forgetting to return the card information from the card reading unit 300 and the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300 ( S1314). The details of the card notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

  When the process of S1314 is executed, when the return variable display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the return button 42 is operated (pressed down) based on the display control device 114. Then, the card return effect process for executing the process of displaying the confirmation notification mode is executed (S1315). The details of the card return effect process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1315 is executed, in the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for switching between the validation and the invalidation of the return button 42, based on the operation of the frame button 22, the control regarding the password input A password input process for executing is executed (S1316). Details of the password input process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is executed, when the player operates the break button 500, a break process of executing the process of invalidating the return button 42 is executed (S1317). Details of the break process (S1317) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1318: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305). This customer waiting effect process (S1305) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, a predetermined time after the special symbol fluctuates and stops. After a lapse of time, the process for displaying the password input screen or the password setting screen for validating and invalidating the return button 42 on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped (that is, the lottery game is not being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401). When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: Yes), the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is incremented by 1 and updated. Since this customer waiting effect process (S1305) is normally executed in a cycle of 1 ms, the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed can be determined by using the value of this counter value as a unit of ms. ing. It is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403). Here, in order to determine whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) to be described later is performed based on the card information command received from the main control device 110. Based on the data about the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e, if the balance is greater than 0, it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted. That is, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0.

  When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more ( S1404). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 5 seconds, the process of S1415 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether there is data set in the password storage area 223h (S1405). Here, in the password storage area 223h, when the password is set by the player in the password input process (FIG. 34, S1316) described later, the password is stored. That is, the fact that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h means that the return button 42 is invalidated by the password being set.

  When it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S1405: Yes), the display password for displaying the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) on the third symbol display device 81. Generate (set) an input command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (that is, the initial value 0 is stored in the password storage area 223m) (S1405: No), the customer waiting counter 223m It is determined whether the value is 30 seconds or more (S1407). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 30 seconds (S1407: No), for displaying the password setting screen (see FIG. 5 (a)) on the third symbol display device 81. A password setting command is generated (set) (S1408).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m is 30 seconds or more (S1407: Yes), the text "The return button is invalidated for crime prevention" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display lock notification command for generating is set (set) (S1409). A return button invalidation signal that invalidates the return button 42 (a state in which no signal is output from the return button 42 even if the return button 42 is operated) is generated (S1410). The return lock flag 223f indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated is set to ON (S1411).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more (S1412). When it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more, a normal display standby command for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is generated on the third symbol display device 81. (S1413). In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: No), the customer waiting counter 223m is reset (cleared) to an initial value of 0 and set ( S1414).

  In the process of S1415, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415: Yes), the subordinate return button flag i is set to ON (that is, the return button with the card inserted). It is determined whether 42 has been operated (S1416). When it is determined that the secondary return button flag 223i is on (S1416: Yes), it is possible to download the wallpaper for displaying the title screen on the standby screen of the mobile phone or the like on the third symbol display device 81. A display two-dimensional code setting command for displaying such a two-dimensional code is generated (set) (S1417). On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value greater than 30 seconds (S1415: No), or when it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1416: No), this The process ends.

  In this way, when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the special symbol remains unchanged for a predetermined time, a password input screen or a password setting screen is displayed. Therefore, the player can set the password or start inputting the password without any special operation by the player. Also, in the state where the return button 42 in which the password has already been set is disabled, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a shorter time than the password setting screen is displayed, the password input screen is displayed. With this configuration, when the player wants to activate the return button 42, he / she can start inputting the password without waiting for a long time.

  In addition, when the state in which the special symbol is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or more, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted, the return button 42 is pressed. Since it is set to be invalidated forcibly, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and the card is stolen. Also, when a card with a balance is not inserted, a normal title screen is displayed as a standby display. Therefore, when there is no player playing the game, a player visiting the PR of the gaming machine, etc. You can do it.

  Further, when the balance card is inserted, the return button 42 is operated within a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special symbol is stopped, and the card is returned, Since the two-dimensional code is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (the game privilege is given), when the player finishes the game, he / she operates the return button 42 within the time period to obtain the game privilege. You can get what you want to get. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and goes home. In the present embodiment, the game privilege is configured to display a two-dimensional code. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information about pachinko machines 10 to be released in the future). Etc.) may be displayed, or some prize balls may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 26) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1501). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1503). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1507). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display holding count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). In the process of S1508, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1508 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1508 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1508 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1507, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1507: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1509). Then, when the prize information command is received (S1509: Yes), the result of winning / deciding judgment indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding area of the prize information storage area 223a (S1510). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired by the main controller 110, and each acquired counter is acquired. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3, the original lottery. Various types of information obtained when is performed are pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1509, when the winning information command is not received (S1509: No), it is then determined whether the card information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1511). When the card information command is received (S1511: Yes), the balance information of the card is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e based on the received card information command (S1512). On the other hand, when it is determined that the card information command has not been received (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1513). ), And returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This fluctuation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1312), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1615 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 28), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the process of S1606, it is determined whether or not the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606). When it is determined that the variation pattern command is out (S1606: No), the card return effect flag 223k is set to OFF (S1607). After that, the pending change process is executed (S1608). The details of the holding change process (S1608) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the card return button 42 is operated, the fluctuation starts. A process of changing the color and notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment is executed with respect to the pending which is sometimes hit. After the pending change process (S1608), the process of S1615 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606: Yes), is it a state in which a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300? It is determined (S1609). If it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card with the balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1610). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1610: Yes), the value of the lottery counter 223j is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is one of the winning values "0 to 4" (S1612).

  When it is determined that the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is out of range (S1612: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is a win (S1612: Yes), the return variation display mode is changed to the variation pattern set in S1604 on the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The card return effect flag 223k that indicates is set to ON (S1613). The display variation pattern command set in S1604 is overwritten to generate (set) a display card return effect command.

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1615). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1615: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, and thus this variable display The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1615: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1616), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1617). Next, the stop type acquired in the process of S1617 is set as a display stop type command (S1618).

  Next, the pending change process (S1608) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pending change process (S1608). This hold change process (S1608) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the card with which the card reading unit 300 has a balance. When the return button 42 is operated when is inserted, if there is a big hit hold at the start of fluctuation, a process of displaying the result of the hit / miss judgment to the player by changing the hold display color is executed.

  In the hold change processing (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, is the value stored in the slave card information storage area 223e greater than 0)? S1621). If it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: Yes), the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (that is, the special symbol is reserved). Is stored) is determined (S1622). When it is determined that the holding of the special symbol is 0 (S1622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding of the special symbol is stored (S1622: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1623). If it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1623: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is ON (S1623: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a winning hold among the pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1624).

  If it is determined that all the holdings are missed (S1624: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning hold is stored in the holding (S1624: Yes), it is displayed in the display color (red in the present embodiment) indicating to the player that the holding is a big hit. A hold change command to be generated is generated (S1625).

  In this way, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variation pattern that is a jackpot of the special symbol, the return variation display mode is replaced by the variation pattern set by the main control device 110 by lottery. Since it is determined, the player can be informed that the jackpot will be won early by displaying the return variation display mode. In addition, the return variation display mode is based on the fact that the player is informed during the change of the special symbol to operate the card return button 42 as shown in FIG. 4B, and the return button 42 is operated. Since the effect of notifying the player of a big hit early (confirmation notification) is executed, the player can operate the return button 42 early to return the card from the card reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card. Furthermore, since the return variable display mode is a variation pattern that is a big hit, it often takes a while until the ball lending operation is required thereafter, so while the ball lending operation is not performed for a long time, By forgetting that the card with the remaining balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the card.

  Further, even if the variation pattern is not a big hit, by operating the return button 42, it is configured to notify the result of the prefetch of the hold, which is a bonus in the game, so that the player can enjoy the return button. 42 can be operated, and the return button 42 can always be made aware. Therefore, the trouble of forgetting to return the card can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the timing of operating the return button 42 coincides with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, it is configured to notify the prefetching of the hold, so that the result of the prefetching of the hold is easily notified. However, it is configured so that the player can enjoy performing the operation in synchronization with the timing many times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead is performed based on the operation at any timing. The result may be notified. Further, the present invention is not limited to the result of prefetching, and may be configured to notify the determined variation pattern type (reach, super reach, etc.), or may be configured to display a specific character. However, it may be configured to give the player points in the game (a privilege such as increasing the displayed characters by accumulating the points).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a card effect control process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this card effect control processing (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled so that the card is forcibly ejected at the start of the jackpot. Alternatively, a process for determining whether the return button 42 has been operated with a card with a balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is executed.

  In the card effect control processing (S1313), first, it is determined whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether a balance greater than 0 is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e) (S1701). ). When it is determined that the card with the balance is not inserted (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card with the balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1701: Yes), whether the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot has been received from the main control device 110 (that is, the jackpot). It is determined whether the game is started (S1702). When it is determined that the opening command is received (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1703). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1703: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1703: No), the card ejection signal for causing the card reading unit 300 to return the card is set. As shown in FIG. 13, this card ejection signal is a signal that activates the signal directly on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction unit 42a, and is the same as when the return button 42 is operated. Let the state.

  The slave card information storage area 223e is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1705). The card output notification sound command for outputting the sound "The card will be returned. Please receive it." Is set on the sound output device 226. The display card ejection notification command for displaying the character "The card will be returned. Please remember to receive it !!" is set on the third pattern display device 81 (S1707).

  In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the card is forcibly returned in the state where the return button 42 is activated, so that the player does not have to operate the return button 42. , Cards can be collected. Therefore, the trouble of the player can be reduced. Also, because the opportunity to forcibly return it was the start of the jackpot game, the need for ball lending continued for a while and the player forgot to return the card and went home. It is possible to prevent the malfunction. In addition, since the card will be forcibly returned at the timing when the need for a ball lending will be lost for a while, immediately after the card is forcibly returned, the ball lending is required immediately, and the time and effort of having to insert the card again is required. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1702: No), it is determined whether the return button 42 has been operated (pressed) (S1708). When it is determined that the return button 42 has been operated (S1708: Yes), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to ON (S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 is not operated (S1708: No), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to OFF (S1710).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the card notification processing (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this card notification processing (S1314). This card notification processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300, The process of informing the three symbol display device 81 of the card information is executed. In addition, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when it is detected that the game is not being executed, it is confirmed that the card with a balance is still inserted in the card reading unit 300. The notification process is executed.

  In the card notification process (S1314), first, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0 (that is, there is a card balance) (S1801). When it is determined that there is no card balance (including the case where the card is not inserted) (S1801: No), the insertion notification lamp turn-off data for turning off the insertion notification lamp 40a is set (S1802).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a card balance (S1801: Yes), the insertion notification lamp 40a for notifying that the card provided in the front frame 14 is inserted into the card reading unit 300 is inserted. Information lamp lighting data is set (S1803). It is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is 3000 yen or more (S1804). When it is determined that the card balance is 3,000 yen or more (S1804: Yes), the voice notification command for outputting the voice "Card is inserted" from the voice output device 226 is set (S1805). A high-priced notification command for display is set to alternately display the characters "The card is in!" And "The card balance is ○○○ yen." (S1806). The amount of XX yen is displayed according to the card balance.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the card balance is less than 3000 yen (S1804: No), the characters "A card is in!" And "The card balance is ○○○ yen." Are displayed in white characters. A display small amount notification command for alternately displaying every 30 seconds is set (S1807). The amount of XX yen is displayed according to the card balance.

  By configuring in this way, while the card balance is high, it is possible to notify the player that the card is inserted by voice and conspicuous characters, so that the player can be made aware of it at all times. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting a certain card and suffering damage such as theft. Also, when the card balance is small, it is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous character color and is configured not to be informed by voice, so that the player is always informed by voice and conspicuous characters, It is possible to prevent problems that can not be concentrated on the game.

  In the present embodiment, the card balance is determined to be high when it is 3000 yen or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount may be set appropriately. Further, it may be provided on the amount setting button and the front frame 14 or the like so that the amount of money as a threshold value for changing the notification can be set by the player's operation. Further, the notification may be prohibited by the selection of the player. With such a configuration, the player can change the setting, and the game can be played in a state that suits the player's preference.

  Further, although the color of the notification character is white, the color of the notification is not limited thereto, and may be a semi-transparent character color. It may be configured to notify that a certain card is inserted.

  It is determined whether the handle sensor 510 is off (S1808). When it is determined that the handle sensor is off (S1808: Yes), the handle counter 223g is incremented by 1 and updated (S1809). It is determined whether the updated value of the handle counter 223g is the set value (15 seconds in this embodiment) or more (S1810). Here, since the handle counter 223g is updated every predetermined period when the handle sensor 510 is off, the handle counter 223g can be determined by converting the value of the handle counter 223g into time from the execution period. .

  When it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is less than the set value (S1810: No), the process of S1813 is executed. When it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than the set value (S1810: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the voice output device 226 to output a beep sound and "I forget to return the card!" The display notification command is set (S1811). On the other hand, when it is determined that the steering wheel sensor 510 is on (S1808), the value of the steering wheel counter 223g is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1812). Then, the process of S1813 is executed.

  As described above, when the handle sensor 510 remains off for a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) or more, if the card with the card balance is still inserted in the card reading unit 300, the player Since a character for notifying the player to return the card and a notification sound for calling the player's attention are output, it can be noticed even when the player forgets to return the card. Further, even if the user has already left his / her seat, he / she can be made aware that he / she has forgotten to return the card by hearing the alarm sound, and can be returned to the seat again. Also, even if the player returns home without noticing the notification sound, the clerk of the game store can recognize that the card has been forgotten by the notification sound, and the player manages it as a forgotten item at the game store. can do.

  In the processing of S1813, it is determined whether or not the human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14 is on (that is, there is no player in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813). If it is determined that the motion sensor 400 is on (S1814: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the sound output device 226 to output a beep sound and a display notification that "Forgetting to return the card!" The command is set (S1814). On the other hand, when it is determined that the human sensor 400 is off (that is, the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813: No), the process of S1815 is executed.

  In this way, the presence sensor 400 determines whether or not there is a player, determines that there is no player, and if a card with a balance is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the card is not loaded. Since the notification for prompting the return is given, the player can be made aware that he / she has forgotten the return as soon as he / she forgets the return and leaves the seat. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as the theft of the card.

  In the present embodiment, when the human sensor 400 is turned on, the notification regarding the card return is made immediately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the human sensor 400 is turned on. It may be configured to give a notification when the period (), etc. has elapsed. With this configuration, when the player tilts his body a little and the human sensor 400 is turned on for a short time, the notification can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being informed frequently and making the player feel uncomfortable.

  It is determined whether the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are on (S1815). When it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are turned on (S1815: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the sound output device 226 to output a beep sound and "I forget to return the card. The display notification command "!" Is set (S1816). On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a or the ball removal button sensor 52a is off (S1815: No), this process ends.

  When the upper plate sensor 17a is on, it means that there is no game ball in the upper plate 17, and when the ball removal button sensor is on, it means that the ball is discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it can be said that the player is in the state of finishing the game and returning, and in that case, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a notification prompting the return of the card is given. Therefore, the player can notice that the card is still inserted before returning home. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from returning home by forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as theft.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a card return effect process (S1315) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the card return effect process (S1315). The card return effect process (S1315) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the return display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, when the return button 42 is operated, the process of displaying the final notification effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the card return effect processing (S1315), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the balance information stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0). (S1901). When it is determined that the card with the balance is not inserted (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1902). When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1902: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (S1902: Yes), whether the card return effect flag 223k is on (that is, the return variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81). It has been determined) (S1903). When it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is off (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is set on (S1904).

  When it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1904: No), the display mode of the special symbol for informing the third symbol display device 81 that it is a big hit (see the lower diagram of FIG. 4 (b)) Set the display confirmation notification command to be displayed with.

  Thus, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player operates the return button 42 according to the notification content displayed in the return variation display mode, A big hit is reported. Therefore, the player can always play the game while thinking that the variation of the special symbol is not started in the return variation display mode, and can be aware of operating the return button 42. In addition, since the jackpot is notified by operating the return button 42 based on the display of the return variation display mode, even if the card is returned, it is necessary to lend the ball for a while after that. The player has time to save and manage the cards. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as theft. Further, by operating the return button 42, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the function of the return button 42 can be increased in addition to returning the card.

  Next, the password input processing (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the password input process (S1316). This password input process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the password for setting the enable / disable of the return button 42 is input. Perform processing related to input and settings.

  In the password input process (S1316), first, it is determined whether the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the password setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2000). ). When it is determined that the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed (S2000: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S2001: Yes), it is determined whether a button other than the decision button 22a has been operated (S2003).

  When it is determined that any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S2004). When it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is raised by one. The upward direction command is set (S2005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S2006). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: Yes), the numeral designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is lowered by one for display. The down command is set (S2007). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the down button 22d is operated (S2006: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e is operated (S2008).

  When it is determined that the right direction button 22e has been operated (S2008: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right command for display to be set is set (S2009). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the right direction button 22e is operated (S2008: No), it is determined that the left direction button 22c is operated, and the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the cursor. A display leftward command for moving to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S2010).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the decision button 22a has been operated (S2003: No), password processing is executed (S2002). The password process (S2002) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 35. On the password setting screen or the password input screen, the password is set for the password set or input, and the return button 42 is clicked. The process of invalidating or collating the entered password with the set password and, if they match, validate the return button 42 is executed.

  Next, the password processing (S2002) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this password processing (S2002). This password processing (S2002) is executed in the password input processing (S1316 of FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a password for setting the activation and deactivation of the return button 42. Inputs and executes the processing related to setting.

  In the password processing (S2002), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the password storage area 223h) ( S2021). When it is determined that the displayed password setting screen is displayed (S2021: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S2022). Here, the normal password may include a number that is not actually present due to noise or the like (a number other than 1 to 5 in the present embodiment) or a password that has insufficient digits. To be

  When it is determined that the password is normal (S2022: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the password storage area 223h (S2023). A return button invalid signal is generated (S2024). The return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S2025). Here, the return button invalid signal is a signal that deactivates the photo MOS relay of the changeover switch 42b (the diode is turned off) in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is configured to be disconnected and switched to the connected state so that the return button 42 is set to be valid or invalid. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return button 42 may be mechanically fixed by a solenoid or the like so that it cannot be operated (pressed) from the back side. With this configuration, the return button 42 can be invalidated more easily.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password is abnormal (S2022: No), the display error command for displaying the character "Please input the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S2026).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h) (S2021: No), the entered password is the password. It is determined whether or not the passwords stored in the storage area 223h match (S2027). When it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the collation (S2027: Yes), the return button valid signal is set (set). Here, the return button valid signal sets the photo MOS relay, which is the changeover switch 42b, to active to turn on the diode of the photo MOS relay, and the signal line between the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is connected. It is a signal to set to the state of being. The password storage area 223h is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S2029). The return lock flag 223f is set to off (S2030). On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the password storage area 223h do not match (S2027: No), the characters "Password does not match" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The display mismatch error command to be displayed is set.

  In this way, the return button 42 is disabled by setting the password, and the return button 42 is enabled by entering the same password as the set password while the password is set. Since it is possible to cancel (deactivate), if you deactivate the return button 42, even if you forget to operate the return button 42 and leave your seat, the card will be returned to another person. Can be prevented from being stolen. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in a state where the card with the balance is inserted with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a break process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this rest processing (S1317). This break processing (S1317) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the player operates the break button 500 arranged on the front frame 14. Thus, the process for setting the invalidation of the return button 42 is executed.

  In the break processing (S1317), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101). When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether the break button 500 has been operated (pressed) (S2102). When it is determined that the break button 42 has been operated (S2102: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103). When it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: Yes), the display password input command for displaying the password input screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: No), the display password setting command for displaying the password setting screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S2105). On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S2101: No), or if the break button 500 is not operated (S2102: No), this process ends.

  In this way, when the password is set and the return button 42 is not invalidated by operating the break button 500, the process of displaying the password setting screen is executed in the process of the customer waiting effect process (S1305). The password screen can be displayed, the password can be set, and the return button 42 can be invalidated without waiting until the prompt.

  Further, when the password is set by operating the break button 500, the password input screen is displayed. Therefore, when the return button 42 is hurriedly activated and is desired to be activated, the break button 500 is displayed. By operating, the password input screen can be displayed immediately and the return button 42 can be activated. Therefore, the player can do without waiting for the input of the password, and the time can be effectively used.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the password setting screen is displayed by operating the break button 500, but by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is forcibly invalidated, and the pachinko machine is operated. It is also possible to provide a release switch or the like on the back side of the machine 10 for enabling the setting in which the return button 42 is disabled by the break button 500. In this way, by operating the break button 500, the player can immediately take a break, which improves convenience. Further, when the break button is finished and the return button 42 is desired to be released, the setting can be released by calling the clerk of the game shop, and the security can be improved.

  In addition, by pressing the break button 500, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, the shooting of the game ball may be set to be prohibited, and the fact that the player is taking a break is displayed by the third symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on the device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress damage caused by illegally playing a game by another player during a break or when the ball lending button 43 is operated and the game ball is stolen.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the return button 42 is set with a password to switch between invalidation and activation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, by disposing the shutter member 710 capable of covering the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43, and setting a password, the shutter member is set. Locking and unlocking of 710 is performed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the shutter member 710 is arranged and the locking and unlocking is performed by a password.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a shutter button 700 and a shutter member 710 are added to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The shutter button 700, which will be described later in detail, is an operation button for displaying an input or setting screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  The shutter member 710 is made of a thin metal plate, and slides to the left and right to close the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 on the front side and to open the front frame 14 in an open position. It is configured to be movable. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the shutter member 710 and the movable portion of the shutter member 710. 38A is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the closed position, and FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the open position. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), on the front side of the shutter member 710 (the front side of the gaming machine), an operation knob 710a is formed so as to project to the front side so that the player can slide the shutter member 710. ing. Although not shown, the front frame 14 is formed with a rail portion that slidably holds the shutter member 710, and is held by inserting the shutter member 710 into the rail portion. Is configured.

  As a configuration for fixing (locking) the shutter member 710 in the closed position, a lock motor 900 and an L-shaped locking restricting member 900a that rotates in accordance with the rotation of the lock motor 900 are provided. The lock motor 900 rotates 90 degrees in the forward and reverse directions to bring the L-shaped piece of the locking restricting member 900a into contact with one side of the shutter member 710 on the open position side to move from the closed position to the open position. It is moved to a position where the shutter member 710 is restricted and a position where the locking member 900a for locking does not come into contact with the shutter member 710 even if the shutter member 710 slides and is retracted downward.

  A lock sensor 910 for detecting the position of the locking restricting member 900a is provided. The lock sensor 910 is composed of a reflection type optical sensor, and is configured to detect the locking restricting member 900a by reflected light. As shown in FIG. 38A, the lock sensor 910 is arranged at a position where the lock restricting member 900a does not detect the lock restricting member 900a at the position where the lock restricting member 900a restricts the slide of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), at the position where the locking restricting member 900 a is retracted to the position where the sliding of the shutter member 710 is not restricted, the locking restricting member 710 is located at a position where it is detected. That is, when the lock sensor 910 does not detect the locking restricting member 900a (the lock sensor 910 is off), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is fixed, and the lock sensor 910 locks the locking restricting member 710. Is detected (the lock sensor 910 is on), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is unlocked (sliding state).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is fixed or released by the structure as shown in FIG. 38, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the restricting member or the like may be projected and fixed by a solenoid or the like. Alternatively, the sliding operation of the shutter member 710 may be restricted by a strong electromagnet or the like.

  The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the shutter button 700 and the lock motor 900 connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is added.

  The shutter button 700 is composed of a push-down switch, and is arranged on the right side of the ball lending button 43 of the front frame 14 so as to project to the front side. When the shutter button 700 is pressed, an electric signal is output to the input / output port 113 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The lock motor 900 is composed of a stepping motor for rotating the locking restricting member 900 a, and the rotation is controlled based on a signal from the voice lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is composed of a reflective optical sensor for detecting the locking restricting member 900a.

  A shutter password storage area 223p is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The shutter password storage area 223p stores the password input in the shutter process (S1370 of FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 113 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later (see S1373 of FIG. 43). When the shutter member 710 is fixed (when the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p), whether the input password matches the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p. The data in the shutter password storage area 223p is used when the verification is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 40, a main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1300). The main processing (FIG. 40, S1300) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 26, S1300) of the first embodiment in shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350). ) And have been added. Details of the shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and the shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350) will be described later. Each process of S1301 to S1322 in the second embodiment is the same as each process of S1301 to S1322 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1316 is completed, the shutter input process (FIG. 40, S1300) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 41, a shutter input process (S1340) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this shutter input processing (S1340). The shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340) is a process for executing a process for displaying an input screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  In the shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340), first, it is determined whether the shutter 700 has been operated (pressed) (S1341). When it is determined that the shutter button 700 has been operated (S1341: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342). When it is determined that the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: Yes), the display shutter input command is generated (set). This display shutter input command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. 5B.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: No), the display shutter setting command is generated (set) (S1344). This display shutter setting command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has not been operated (S1341: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the player operates the shutter button 700, either the screen for entering the password or the screen for setting the password is automatically set according to the state of the shutter member 710 at that time. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a shutter setting process (S1350) which is one process of the main process (S1300 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this shutter setting processing (S1350). The shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) is performed by moving the cursor or the like on the password input screen or the setting screen based on the operation of the frame button 22, and based on the setting or input of the password, the shutter member 710. Is a process for executing locking or unlocking of the.

  In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), first, is the shutter password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the shutter password setting screen (FIG. 5A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81? It is determined (S1351). When it is determined that the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether a button other than the decision button 22a has been operated (S1353).

  When it is determined that any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: Yes), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S1354). If it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed one above. A display upward command for raising is set (S1355).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the up button 22b is operated (S1354: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d is operated (S1356). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: Yes), the numeral designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is lowered by one. The display down command is set (S1357). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S1358).

  When it is determined that the right direction button 22e has been operated (S1358: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right display command to be displayed is set (S1359). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the right direction button 22e is operated (S1358: No), it is determined that the left direction button 22c is operated, and the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed. A display leftward command for moving the cursor to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S1360).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the decision button 22a has been operated (S1353: No), the shutter process is executed (S1370). The details of the shutter processing (S1370) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. However, on the shutter password setting screen or the shutter password input screen, a password is set for the password set or input, and the shutter member is set. A process of locking (fixing) 710 in the closed position, collating the entered password with the set password, and if they match, unlocking the shutter member 710 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a shutter process (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this shutter processing (S1370). This shutter process (S1370) is executed in the shutter setting process (S1350 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for locking or unlocking the shutter member 710. To do.

  In the shutter process (S1370), first, it is determined whether the displayed screen is a shutter password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether a password is not set in the shutter password storage area 223p). (S1371). When it is determined that the displayed screen is the shutter password setting screen (S1371: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S1372). Here, the normal password may include a number that is not actually present due to noise or the like (a number other than 1 to 5 in the present embodiment) or a password that has insufficient digits. To be

  When it is determined that the password is normal (S1372: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1373). A signal for operating the lock motor 900 to the closed position (in the present embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the open position) is set (S1374).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password is abnormal (S1372: No), the display error command for displaying the character "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1375).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shutter password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p) (S1371: No), the password input this time is displayed. Determines whether the passwords stored in the shutter password storage area 223p match (S1376). When it is determined that the passwords match each other as a result of the collation (S1376: Yes), a signal for moving the lock restricting member 900a to the unlock position where the lock motor 900 unlocks the shutter member 710 is set (this). In the embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the lock position) (S1377). The shutter password storage area 223p is reset to the initial value (0 in this embodiment) (S1378).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p do not match (S1376: No), the text "Password does not match" appears on the third pattern display device 81. The display mismatch error command for displaying is set (S1379).

  By setting the password in this way, the shutter member 710 can be locked at the closed position. Therefore, the player can lock the shutter member 710 by prohibiting the sliding of the shutter member 710 by setting the password on the shutter password setting screen after sliding the shutter member 710 to the closed position. On the other hand, by operating the shutter button 700 while the shutter member 710 is locked, the shutter password input screen is displayed, and the same password set on the shutter password setting screen is input, The shutter member 710 can be unlocked. Therefore, the shutter member 710 can be locked or unlocked by an easy operation. In addition, the password is reset once it is unlocked, so even if the player changes, the password set by the previous player does not remain and you can use the password without confusion. Lock or unlock operation can be performed.

  In this embodiment, once the shutter member 710 is locked by the password, the lock is maintained until the set password is input or the initialization process of the RAM 223 is executed. Not limited to that, the lock may be automatically released after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 are locked. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, even if the shutter member 710 is left in a locked state inadvertently, the shutter member 710 is automatically released or notified when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed. By doing so, the normal state can be restored by the initial processing of the RAM 223 by the clerk of the game shop.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be slid by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shutter member 710 can be automatically moved to the closed position by setting a password or pressing the shutter button. You may comprise. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the user forgets to slide the shutter member 710 to the closed position and tries to set a password. Further, by operating the shutter button 700, the shutter member 710 may be automatically locked without requiring a password or the like. In such a case, the lock may be released by calling a clerk of the game shop or performing the lock release by fingerprint authentication or the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, both the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 are covered with the shutter member 710, but it is also possible to cover only one of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43. Good. Further, the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 may be provided with dedicated shutters so that they can be individually locked.

  In this embodiment, the password is used to lock the shutter member 710, but the invention is not limited to this, and fingerprint authentication or voice recognition may be used, or the pachinko machine 10 side forcibly issues a password or a two-dimensional code. Then, the player may take a memo or take a picture with a mobile phone or the like to manage it, or the pachinko machine 10 may issue a dedicated IC card or the like. With such a configuration, the player can easily lock the return button 42 or the ball lending button 43 without the problem that the player forgets the password.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 extracts the signals for lighting the respective segments of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, so that the balance information of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is extracted. It is configured to determine On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the light amount of each of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance display 41 is detected, and the balance displayed on the balance display 41 based on the detected light amount. The difference is that the configuration is to detect information. The other configurations are the same.

  As a configuration for detecting the light amount of each LED of the balance indicator 41, a light detection sensor capable of detecting an extremely small amount of light is arranged for each LED on the balance display surface of the balance indicator 41. Further, not only that, but a wall portion that stands up partially or entirely around the balance display surface on which the balance of the balance indicator 41 is displayed is provided, and a light detection sensor capable of detecting the amount of light is provided on the wall portion. You may arrange | position toward each LED. Further, the substrate on which each LED is arranged may be formed of a transparent substrate, and a light detection sensor for detecting the light amount of each LED may be provided on the back side of the substrate.

  Further, the light detection sensor is configured to be provided for each LED, but the invention is not limited thereto, and thus it may be configured to be provided for each LED segment. With this configuration, it is possible to more accurately detect the balance display that is lit and displayed on the balance display 41. Further, the light detection sensor may be arranged so as to detect the total amount of light with which the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c are turned on. With this configuration, the number of light detection sensors can be reduced, and the number of wiring lines and the like can be reduced.

  The main controller 110 receives the light amount detected by the light detection sensor as a light amount signal via the payout controller 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the display information data corresponding to the light amount indicated by the light amount signal, based on the received light amount signal. In this determination method, a display information correspondence table in which display information is stored in association with each combination of light amounts detected by each light detection sensor is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the table is set. The display information corresponding to the light amount is selected from the display information correspondence table to determine the card balance.

  With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can identify the display information displayed on the balance display device 41 without electrically connecting the balance display device 41 and the main control device 110. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being transmitted from the card reading unit 300 to the main control device 110. It is also possible to prevent an illegal signal from being sent from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, the light detection sensor for detecting the amount of light is used, but the balance information may be acquired by using an image pickup unit or the like for recognizing the balance display displayed on the balance display 41. You may comprise. In such a case, in order not to hinder the player from visually recognizing the display of the balance indicator 41, the display is tilted diagonally to a position where it does not overlap with the LEDs on the opposite side of the substrate on which the LEDs are arranged. A mirror may be provided and the balance display projected on the mirror may be imaged (captured) from each LED substrate side. Further, each LED of the balance indicator 41 may be arranged on a transparent substrate, and the balance display may be imaged (captured) from the back side of each LED substrate.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined and the balance is notified by the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, an investment amount storage area for storing the reduction amount of the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 as the total investment amount is provided, This is different from the first embodiment in that the game history information and the like are given to the player based on the value of the investment amount storage area. The other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  First, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. On the standby screen, when the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 of the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, a menu screen is displayed, and a screen for inputting a password for managing game history information can be selected. This password is issued based on the player's information stored in the server by the player's information being stored in the server when the player registers as a member on a specific homepage using a mobile phone or the like. Password.

  Information stored in the server includes the number of jackpots, a specific reach, a specific game state (such as the number of consecutive positive changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the total amount of investment, and payment. The total of the game balls issued, the balance based on the amount of investment and the game balls paid out, the total points awarded in the game, and the like are stored.

  Depending on the information stored in the server, the privilege obtained on the home page accessed by the player may change, or the password may be entered into the gaming machine, resulting in an unusual mode (voice, music, type of displayed character, etc.). ) Changes. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is reached, the wallpaper displayed on the standby screen of the mobile phone, the ringtone of the mobile phone, etc., which could not be obtained until now, can be downloaded, or the Characters, images, music, etc. displayed on the symbol display device 81 will be played in a manner different from usual.

  When the password issued on the member-only screen of the homepage is input to the pachinko machine 10, various information stored in the server can be discriminated by the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a corresponding password is preset for the information stored in the server, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 reads the corresponding data from the ROM 223 when the password is input. Is set. Then, when the game is played, various information in the game (the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (the number of consecutive probable changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are read by the password. The stored data is added or updated and stored.

  When the player finishes the game, by operating the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 to display the menu screen and select issuance of the two-dimensional code, various information updated in the game this time ( A process for generating a two-dimensional code is executed based on the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (such as the number of consecutive probable changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), and the third process is performed. The generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the symbol display device 81. The player takes in the two-dimensional code by using the camera function of the mobile phone and accesses the member-only page of the home page indicated by the two-dimensional code. As a result, various information newly updated in the game played this time is stored in the server.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to identify the total investment amount of the player and the balance and the like so far, the variation pattern of the special symbol selected is changed based on the investment amount and the balance and the like. To be done. Specifically, for a player with a large investment amount, when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is a big hit, in a normal time (when the investment amount is small), a premium with a low probability of being selected The reach selection probability is set high. As a result, for players with a large amount of investment, that is, for players with a long playing time, it is easy to select premium reach, and all types of fluctuation patterns of special symbols set on the pachinko machine 10 can be seen. It is configured so that it can be easily performed.

  Further, in the case of a big hit, by displaying the income and expenditure information on the third symbol display device 81, the income and expenditure so far can be confirmed, and the income and expenditure is positive if the probability variation state continues for a number of times in succession. You can see if Therefore, the player can play a game with a goal, and when he / she achieves the goal, he can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in order to detect the firing of the game ball, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 measures the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. In the present embodiment, 100 game balls are shot per minute, so the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the number of shots based on the measured time. It should be noted that, in order not to include in the measurement time, the case where the handle sensor 510 is turned on even though the game ball has not been fired, the handle sensor 510 is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Second), when the game ball does not pass through the second ball entrance 67, the measurement can be stopped to calculate a more accurate number of shots. In this case, when the game ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the measurement may be restarted.

  In this way, by detecting the launch of the game ball, whether you are playing with the game ball by lending a ball, or whether you are not lending the ball and playing with the ball you got with a jackpot etc. It can be determined by the change in the forehead over time. When it is determined that the player is playing a game with a ball, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is operated so as to perform a card return operation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the card return 42 and returning home with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by the theft of the card and the misuse of the card information (the operation of lending the ball without permission).

  Also, if you are playing with this ball, the state of the game so far (state after the big hit or the difference between the game ball paid out so far (on that day) and the game ball launched ) Determines whether it is possible to play a game with a holding ball, and it is not possible to play a game with a holding ball (that is, when it is not after a big hit, or when the number of differential balls fired is more) State), the game shop side can confirm the state of the pachinko machine 10 by outputting an error command to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal (not shown). Therefore, even if a game ball is illegally brought from outside the store and played, the illegality can be found early. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the game shop.

  In the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball is fired is determined by measuring the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game ball 13 is fired by the ball firing unit 112a. It may be configured to count by providing a sensor for detecting the game balls, or may be configured to detect and count the number of game balls supplied to the ball launch unit 112a.

  The configurations of the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment may be combined appropriately.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

  External signal receiving means that is provided outside the gaming machine and receives an external signal that is output based on the reading of valuable value information stored in the storage medium by an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium In a gaming machine having an external control means that is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means, a signal for extracting an external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means. Based on the extraction means and the external signal extracted by the signal extraction means, the storage medium determination means for determining whether the external device has read the storage medium, and the control means for executing the main control of the game are the storage medium. A notification means for notifying the player of the information about the storage medium to the player based on the notification signal output by the judgment result of the judgment means. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, an external signal which is provided outside the gaming machine and which is output based on the reading of the valuable value information stored in the storage medium by the external device which requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium Is received by the external signal receiving means. The external control means is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means. The external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external signal extracted by the signal extracting unit, the storage medium determining unit determines whether the external device has read the storage medium. Based on the notification signal output by the control means for executing the main control of the game based on the determination result of the storage medium determination means, the information about the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. Thereby, the player can determine whether or not there is a storage medium read by the external device, based on the information about the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player forgets to read the storage medium into the external device. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage caused when the player returns home with the storage medium being read and is stolen with respect to the storage medium or the valuable value information stored in the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1, a display mode based on valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device has a valuable display means for which display control is performed by the external device, and the signal extracting means has the valuable display. An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the external device, wherein the storage medium determining device is configured to extract the external display control signal based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extracting device. Is for discriminating the valuable value information of the storage medium read, and the notifying means provides the player with information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the discrimination result of the storage medium discriminating means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by notifying a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode based on the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is display-controlled by the valuable device by the external device. An external display control signal output from an external device for controlling the display of the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extracting means, the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is discriminated by the storage medium discriminating means. Based on the determination result, the player is notified of the information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium by the notification means. As a result, the valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means can be discriminated and a notification can be given based on the valuable value information. Therefore, more accurate information about the storage medium read in the external device can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player forgets to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the valuable display means is configured to display predetermined information by displaying a plurality of light emitting segments in combination, and the external display control signal is Each of the plurality of light emitting segments is output respectively, and the signal extracting means extracts the display control signals output corresponding to the respective light emitting segments as external display control signals. The storage medium discriminating means discriminates valuable value information of the storage medium by combining the respective extracted external display control signals.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, predetermined information is displayed on the valuable display means by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments. A display control signal is output for each of the plurality of light emitting segments. The display control signal corresponding to each light emitting segment is extracted by the signal extraction means as an external display control signal. By combining the extracted respective external display control signals, the valuable information of the storage medium is discriminated by the storage medium discriminating means. Thereby, the display content displayed by the valuable display means can be accurately determined. Therefore, the player can be notified of more accurate information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read in the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extracting means outputs a signal by receiving a light emitting element that emits light when the external signal is input and a light receiving element that receives the light emitted from the light emitting element. And a gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising at least:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. At least the signal extraction unit is configured by a light emitting element that emits light when an external signal is input and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. As a result, since the light emitting element cannot be emitted from the gaming machine side, it is possible to suppress fraudulent output from the gaming machine side to the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent output of the lending signal to the external device. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extracting means is at least a magnetic field detecting means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when the external signal is output. Characteristic game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. At least the signal extracting unit is configured by a magnetic field detecting unit that detects a magnetic field that changes when an external signal is output. As a result, since it is not possible to directly output a signal from the gaming machine side to the external device, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being output to the external device.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and receives a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. In a gaming machine for paying out a game medium, an operating unit having an operation unit operable by the player, and a storage medium read by the external device is returned to the player based on the operation of the operating unit. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal for executing the return processing or the release processing for canceling the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium to the external device, and the operation part of the operation means is not operated. In this case, the forced return control means for outputting a return signal to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger is also included. Game machine B1 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out based on the lending request signal. Based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation means is not operated, the return signal is output by the forced return control means to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. Thereby, the storage medium read by the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be released to the external device under the control of the gaming machine side. Therefore, the player forgets the operation of performing the storage medium return processing or the valuable value information releasing processing, and thus damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, a win / loss determination means for executing a win / loss determination of a game based on the satisfaction of a win / loss determination condition, and a display control means for displaying on the display means identification information capable of identifying the win / loss determination result of the win / loss determination means. If the display means displays identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player, and the forced return control means, A gaming machine B2, wherein the return signal is output to the operation signal output means on the basis of the hit determination result of the hit determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays on the display means identification information capable of identifying the result of the judgment. When the display unit displays the identification information indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit, the privilege game executing unit executes the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player. Then, the return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss determination means. As a result, it is possible to return the storage medium read in the external device or cancel reading the valuable value information based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player does not have to be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the external device has read the valuable value information of the storage medium, and forgetting the return process or the cancellation process. Therefore, the damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the win / win determination condition is satisfied, the win / win determination condition that is satisfied is stored until a start condition is displayed that displays identification information for win / loss determination corresponding to the win / win determination condition. The forced return determination means for determining whether or not the determination result corresponding to the determination condition stored in the determination determination storage means is determined before the start condition is satisfied. The game machine B3, wherein the control means causes the operation signal output means to output the return signal based on the determination that the advance hit determination means is a hit.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. To be done. The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the fact that the advance hit determination means determines that the hit is successful. As a result, the return process or the cancellation process is executed by the external device before the identification information indicating the win / loss judgment result is displayed on the display unit, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the win / loss judgment result in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the cancellation process will not be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device is reading the storage medium.

  Valuable display means for displaying and controlling information based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine by the external device, and a predetermined value corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a predetermined game medium to a player based on receiving a lending request signal for requesting the game machine to lend the game medium, the valuable display means is operated from the external device to the valuable display means. A signal extracting means for extracting the output display control signal, a valuable discriminating means for discriminating valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on the signal extracted by the signal extracting means, and the valuable discriminating means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising: a notifying unit for notifying the discriminating information regarding the valuable value information discriminated by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device provided outside the gaming machine is displayed on the valuable display means by the external device. The predetermined game medium is paid out to the player by the payout means based on the reception of the lending request signal requesting the game machine to lend the predetermined game medium corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device. The display control signal output from the external device to the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the extracted signal, the valuable discriminating means discriminates the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device. Discrimination information regarding the discriminated valuable value information is reported by the report notification means. Thus, by extracting the signal for displaying the valuable display means, it is possible to determine the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, the player can be notified of the detailed value information by notifying the determination information regarding the determined value information by the notifying means. Therefore, by forgetting to let the player recognize that the valuable information of the storage medium is being read by the external device, he forgets to execute the return processing of the storage medium and the cancel processing of the valuable information. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering damage such as the storage medium being stolen or the valuable information being misused.

  In the gaming machine C1, the valuable display means displays the balance information corresponding to the valuable value information stored in the storage medium as information based on the valuable value information, and pays out the predetermined gaming medium. Is executed, the remaining balance information corresponding to the updated valuable value information is consumed and updated, and the notification means is displayed on the valuable display means. A remaining gaming balance information is notified as the discrimination information, and the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, as the information based on the valuable value information, the remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is displayed, and every time the predetermined game medium is paid out, the valuable value corresponding to it is displayed. The remaining balance information corresponding to the consumed and updated valuable value information is updated and displayed on the valuable display means. The remaining balance information displayed on the valuable display means is notified by the notification means as discrimination information. Thus, by notifying the player of the remaining balance of the storage medium, it is possible to recognize that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously determining that there is no remaining balance even though the storage medium has a remaining balance and stopping the game without executing the return process or the cancellation process. is there.

  In the gaming machine C2, the notification means has a display means capable of displaying a display mode based on the remaining balance information, and the valuable determination means determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a preset set value. In this case, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in the normal display mode, while if it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than a preset setting value, the normal mode is displayed. A gaming machine C3, wherein a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the display mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the notification means, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed by the display means. Further, when the valuable discriminating unit determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than the preset set value, the display unit displays the display mode based on the remaining balance information in the normal display mode. When it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than the preset set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the normal display mode. As a result, when the remaining balance is larger than the set value, it is displayed in a display mode different from that in the normal time, so that the player can strongly recognize that the remaining balance is large. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the return processing and the cancellation processing with a large amount of the remaining balance, and causing a great loss to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a win / loss determination means for performing a win / loss determination based on the satisfaction of a win / loss determination condition, and an identification information for notifying the player of the win / loss determination result of the win / loss determination means And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the display control means displays the display control means and the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit. When the privilege game execution means determines that the privilege game is to be executed, the informing means stores the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the privilege game. Notify the player to perform an operation to perform a return process to return or a release process to release the valuable information of the read storage medium. Gaming machine C4, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. On the basis of the satisfaction of the hit / miss judgment condition, the hit / miss judgment is executed by the hit / miss judgment means. Identification information for notifying the player of the result of the judgment is displayed on the display means by the display control means. When the display control means displays on the display means identification information indicating that the hit / miss determination result is a hit, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game execution means determines that the privilege game is to be executed, the return process of returning the storage medium of the external device or the reading of the read storage medium is performed based on the start of the privilege game. The informing means informs the return informing mode informing that the player is to perform the operation of executing the releasing process of releasing the valuable information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player to execute the return process or the cancellation process based on the start of the privilege game, so that while the player is executing the privilege game, the external device is notified. It is possible to prevent a problem of forgetting that the valuable information of the storage medium is being read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the storage medium from being stolen and the valuable information from being misused.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, A gaming machine having an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and a state in which the external device is reading valuable value information of a storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. The external device based on the operation of operating the operating device having an operating unit operable by the player and the external determining device for determining whether or not the operating device is operated. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device to return the storage medium to the player or return processing for releasing the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium, On the condition that the operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated and the external determining means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the game is played. An informing means for informing a person of an operation informing mode for informing the person to operate the operating means, and when the operating informing mode is informed by the informing means, the operation determining means operates the operating means. Based on the determination, the notification means includes notification switching means for switching to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. Game machine D1 which is characterized in.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and lends the gaming medium output to the gaming machine based on the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. In addition, a return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of an operation unit having an operation unit operable by the player, or reading of valuable value information of the storage medium. The operation signal output means outputs a return signal for executing a releasing process for releasing the. Further, the operation determining means determines whether or not the operating means has been operated. On the condition that the external discriminating means discriminates that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the notifying means informs the player to operate the operating means. To be done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification means, the notification switching means is switched to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode by the notification determination means based on the determination that the operation means is operated. Can be switched by. As a result, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the cancellation process according to the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information.

  The gaming machine D1 has a return signal extracting means for extracting a return signal output based on the operation of the operating portion, and the operation determining means has the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extracting means. A game machine D2 for determining whether or not the operation means is operated by a player based on the above.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extraction return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player. Thereby, it is possible to accurately recognize whether the player has operated the operation means. Therefore, the player can be notified in a specific notification mode based on the timing at which the operation means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the player has operated the operation means, and it is possible to confirm without forgetting the processing of the external device.

  The gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2 has valuable display means for displaying balance information indicated by valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on an external control signal received by the receiving means, The external discriminating means is configured to discriminate the balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extracting means, and the operation discriminating means causes the external discriminating means to pass the balance information through a predetermined minimum balance. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it is determined that the operating means has been operated when it is determined that the operating means has been lost.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or the game machine D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. The balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means based on the extracted external signal. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has passed without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. Thus, it is possible to determine that the player has operated the operating means without detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the notification of the hit determination means for executing the hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition and the identification information capable of distinguishing the hit determination result of the hit determination means. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, which is one of the means, and a dynamic display manner for deciding the dynamic display manner of the identification information displayed by the display control means on the win / fail judgment means based on the win / no judgment result. Means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display mode determining means Yes, based on the fact that the external discriminating means discriminates that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the player operates the operating means. It is for determining a return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode to be notified, and the notification switching means, when the operation notification mode is displayed, the operation determination means performs the operation. A gaming machine D4, which switches to a display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the hit based on the determination that the means has been operated.

  According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays the identification information capable of identifying the result of the hit determination on the display means which is one of the notification means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic determination mode determination unit by the dynamic determination mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The operation of notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the result of the hit / damage determination being a hit and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. The return dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode including the notification mode, is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching means switches the display mode to notify the identification information indicating the hit based on the determination that the operation determination means has operated the operation means. As a result, since the identification information indicating the hit is displayed by operating the operation means in the dynamic display mode of the identification information, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of operating the operation means. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that the return dynamic display mode will be determined, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the operation means. Therefore, the damage caused by the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the notification of the hit determination means for executing the hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition and the identification information capable of distinguishing the hit determination result of the hit determination means. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, which is one of the means, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means; When a condition is met, a win / loss judgment storage means for storing the hit / miss judgment condition that has been satisfied until the start condition that displays identification information for the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met A prior win determination means for determining the win determination result corresponding to the win determination condition stored in the determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the notification means includes: When it is determined that the external device is in a state where the external device is reading valuable value information of the storage medium, when the operation determination device determines that the operation device has been operated, the advance acceptance determination A gaming machine D5 characterized by notifying the player of the determination result of the means.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. Identification information capable of identifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. . The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means. Thus, by operating the operation means, it is possible to give a bonus to the player and increase the chances that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player forgetting to operate the operation means and suffering from the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information A payout means for paying out the game medium, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A gaming machine having: an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal; and, based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, the external device reads valuable value information of a storage medium. The external determination means for determining whether or not it is in a state, the operation means having an operation unit operable by the player, and the operation of the operation means based on the operation An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device to return the storage medium read by the device to the player, or to perform a release process to release the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium. A valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means And a switching control means for switching when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium to output corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for playing. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is set in a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. When the condition is established, the switching is performed by the switching control means. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return processing or the cancellation processing by switching to the prohibition state in which the return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the damage of the theft is encountered. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  The gaming machine E1 has an input means capable of inputting an identification symbol based on the operation of the player, and an identification information storage means for storing the identification information input by the input means, and the switching control means. Indicates that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition is determined to be a state in which the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Based on the stored information, while switching from the valid state to the prohibited state, in the prohibited state, the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit. Based on the above, the gaming machine E2 is configured to switch from the prohibited state to the valid state.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external device determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the switching control unit switches from the prohibited state to the valid state based on that the input unit inputs the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. With this, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage due to the theft of the storage medium by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a clocking means for measuring the switching execution time, and the clocking means having a preset value or more. A gaming machine E3 characterized by having a forced releasing means for forcibly switching to a valid state when it becomes.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the switching execution time is measured by the time counting means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the timekeeping means exceeds a predetermined set value, it is forcibly switched to the valid state by the forcible cancellation means. As a result, the prohibited state can be automatically canceled at the preset time. Therefore, even if it is illegally set to the prohibited state, it can be automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is set based on a predetermined trigger. A gaming machine E4 having a notifying means for notifying.

  The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is notified by the notification unit based on a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to easily determine that the prohibition state has been switched to the prohibition state. Therefore, in the case where the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left as it is, the gaming shop side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information A payout means for paying out the game medium, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A gaming machine having: an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal; and, based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, the external device reads valuable value information of a storage medium. An external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player is in a state, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means for allowing the external device to detect the value When it is determined that the player is not being read by the player detection means and the player is not reading the valuable information of the storage medium by the external device. A gaming machine F1 having: a notifying means for notifying a notification mode indicating that there is.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium to output corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for playing. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is set in a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. When the condition is established, the switching is performed by the switching control means. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return processing or the cancellation processing by switching to the prohibition state in which the return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the damage of the theft is encountered. Can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, A gaming machine having an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and a state in which the external device is reading valuable value information of a storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. An external determination means for determining whether the game is being played, a game execution determination means for determining a period during which a game is being played by a player, and a predetermined period by the game execution determination means When it is determined that the game is not being played, it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F2, further comprising: a notifying unit for notifying a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external device determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the switching control unit switches from the prohibited state to the valid state based on that the input unit inputs the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. With this, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage due to the theft of the storage medium by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, a storage means capable of storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and a discharge means for discharging the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the game machine by the operation of the player And a external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A storage discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are stored in the storing means, a discharge operation discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are discharged by the discharging means, and the external control External signal extracting means for extracting a signal, and external determining means for determining whether the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. When the discharge operation determination means determines that the discharge operation has been executed, and the storage determination means determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination means causes the external device to store the valuable value of the storage medium. When it is determined that the information is being read, the player has a notifying means for giving a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F3, the switching execution time is measured by the clocking means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the timekeeping means exceeds a predetermined set value, it is forcibly switched to the valid state by the forcible cancellation means. As a result, the prohibited state can be automatically canceled at the preset time. Therefore, even if it is illegally set to the prohibited state, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

In the gaming machine F1 to the gaming machine F3, an operation unit having an operation unit operable by the player,
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operation means. An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which output of the return signal by the operation signal output means is prohibited based on the establishment of a setting condition. And a gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is notified by the notification unit based on a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to easily determine that the prohibition state has been switched to the prohibition state. Therefore, in the case where the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left as it is, the gaming shop side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out, and a valuable display means for displaying and controlling information based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device, the valuable display means is displayed on the valuable display means. Image information detecting means for detecting the image information, the information discriminating means for discriminating the valuable value information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means from the image information detected by the image information detecting means, and the information discriminating means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a notifying means for notifying a player of a notification mode regarding the valuable value information determined by.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. According to the lending request signal, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. Information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is displayed on the valuable display means whose display is controlled by the external device. The image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detecting means. The valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means is discriminated by the information discriminating means from the image information detected by the image information detecting means. The informing means informs the player of the informed form regarding the determined valuable value information. As a result, not only the valuable display means, but also the notification mode can be used to confirm the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Therefore, damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means is for detecting the light quantity of the image information displayed on the valuable display means, and the information discriminating means is based on the light quantity detected by the image information detecting means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by determining valuable value information corresponding to the amount of light.

  The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the light amount of the image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detecting means. Based on the amount of light detected by the image information detecting means, valuable information corresponding to the amount of light is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be determined in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can accurately identify the information regarding the valuable information.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means executes image processing for taking in an image displayed on the valuable display means, digitizing and converting the image, and the information discriminating means converting by the image processing. 2. The gaming machine G3 according to claim 1, wherein the game machine G3 discriminates valuable value information corresponding to the calculated numerical value.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the image information detecting means executes the image processing of taking in the image displayed on the valuable display means, digitizing it, and converting it. Valuable value information corresponding to the numerical value converted by the image processing is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be determined in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can accurately identify the information regarding the valuable value information.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game medium, an operation means having an operation unit operable by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device based on the operation means being operated. An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return processing for returning to the player or a release processing for canceling reading of the valuable information of the storage medium, and an operation section of the operation means. In order to establish a predetermined change condition, a restricting means for setting a permission state in which the player can operate and a prohibition state in which the player is more difficult to operate than the permission state. Zui, the gaming machine and wherein the switching control means for switching the regulating means to either of said disabled state and the enabled state, and has a H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. According to the lending request signal, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. A return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output from the operation signal output means to the external device. The restricting means sets a permitting state in which the player can operate the operating portion of the operating means and a prohibiting state in which it is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitting state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the switching control means switches the restricting means to either the permitted state or the prohibited state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit by setting the prohibition state. Therefore, even if the player forgets the return process or the release process, the storage medium is stolen or valuable information is lost. The damage of abuse can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the restricting means allows the restricting member that can be arranged on the front surface side of the operating portion and the restricting member to move to the front surface side position of the operating portion and a position other than the front surface side of the operating portion. And a movable means capable of controlling the switching member, wherein the switching control means switches the state to the prohibited state by fixing the regulating member at the front side position, and releases the fixed state to change to the permitted state. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being switched.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the restricting member that can be arranged on the front surface side of the operating portion, and the restricting member are moved to the front surface side position of the operating portion and the position other than the front surface side of the operating portion by the movable means. By fixing the regulating member at the position on the front side, the switching control means switches to the prohibited state. On the other hand, by releasing the fixation, the switching control means switches to the permitted state. As a result, in the prohibited state, it becomes difficult to operate the operation unit by the restriction member, and the player can easily determine that the prohibited state is set. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind by confirming that the game is switched to the prohibited state.

  In the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the gaming machine H1 or H2 has an input unit capable of inputting identification information by a player's operation, and an identification information storage unit capable of storing the identification information input by the input unit. In the permitting state, the means switches from the permitting state to the prohibiting state, assuming that the identification information input by the inputting means is newly stored in the identification information storage means as a change condition. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the change condition is satisfied when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit, and the permission is changed from the prohibited state. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being switched to a state.

  The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2. That is, the identification information is input by the input means by the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. In the permitted state, the switching control unit switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state, assuming that the change condition is satisfied when the identification information input by the input unit is newly stored in the identification information storage unit. On the other hand, in the prohibition state, the changeover condition from the prohibition state to the permission state is regarded as the establishment of the change condition that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means. Can be switched by. Thereby, it becomes possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state by inputting the identification information, and the prohibited state and the permitted state can be switched according to the convenience of the player. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently and with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium output to the gaming machine corresponding to the read valuable value information. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game medium according to a lending request signal, an external signal receiving means for receiving an external signal to be output to the game machine based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device, Whether the game is being executed by using the valuable media information discriminating device that discriminates the valuable media information based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving device and the game medium. And a game execution determining means for determining whether the game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period of time. By deciding whether the valuable value information discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means has changed by a predetermined value or more, a lending game which is a game using the game medium dispensed by the dispensing means in accordance with the lending request signal is performed. A gaming machine I1 having a lending game determination means for determining whether or not the game machine is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the value to the gaming machine corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend. The external signal receiving means receives an external signal output to the gaming machine based on the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device. Valuable value information is discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means. The game execution determining means determines whether or not the game is being executed using the game medium. During the predetermined period of time during which the game execution determining means determines that the game is being executed using the game medium, the valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means changes by a predetermined value or more. By determining whether or not the lending game determination means determines whether the lending game, which is a game using the game medium paid out by the lending means according to the lending request signal, is being executed. As a result, the gaming machine can determine whether the lending game is being played or a game different from the lending game is being played.

  Based on the external signal, valuable display means for displaying valuable value information indicated by the external signal; and external signal extracting means for extracting the external signal for displaying the valuable display means, wherein the valuable information The discriminating means discriminates the valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means on the basis of the externally extracted signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, and the predetermined valuable value information is displayed. When the value-value information determination means determines that the lending game determination means determines that a game different from the lending game is being executed, the lending game determination means has a notification means for executing a predetermined notification. The gaming machine I2 according to claim 1, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the external signal, the valuable value information indicated by the external signal is displayed by the valuable display means. The external signal for displaying the valuable display means is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means is discriminated by the valuable information discriminating means based on the external extracted signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. Based on the fact that the lending game determination means determines that a game different from the lending game is being executed when the valuable value information determination means determines that the predetermined value information is displayed Is executed by the notification means. As a result, when the lending game is not being performed, a predetermined notification is executed if the storage medium is being read by the external device, so that the player can display the valuable information of the storage medium in the external device. It can make you notice that it is being read. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player leaves the seat while the storage medium is being read in the external device, and the storage medium is stolen or the valuable information is misused.

  The game machine I1 or I2 is displayed on the display means, and a display means for displaying the identification information showing the result of the determination of the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition. Based on the fact that the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determining means and the dynamic display aspect determining means for determining the dynamic display aspect of the identification information is reduced, Investment amount storage means for storing, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from a plurality of the dynamic display modes based on the value of the investment amount storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine I1 or I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the win / loss determination is executed by the win / loss determination executing means based on the satisfaction of the win / loss determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the decrease in the balance indicated by the valuable information judged by the valuable information judging means, the total amount of the decrease is stored in the investment amount storing means. Based on the value of the investment amount storage means, one dynamic display manner is determined from the plurality of dynamic display manners by the dynamic display manner determining means. As a result, the type of dynamic display mode that is determined can be changed based on the investment amount of the player, and different dynamic display modes can be displayed to the player who is playing the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being present. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a combination with a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
17 Upper plate (storage means)
17a Upper plate sensor (storage determination means)
50 Lower plate (storage means)
52a Discharge operation determining means 41 Balance indicator (external receiving means)
42 Return button (operation means, operation signal output means)
42a Return extraction means (return signal extraction means)
81 Third symbol display device (informing means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
114 display control device (display control means)
400 presence sensor (player detection means)
LDa, LDb, LDc Phototransistors (external signal extraction means)
S108 External determination means S1708 Operation determination means S1810 Game execution determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a conventional game machine or the like , a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a game medium such as a game ball to a game machine is lent using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend a game medium such as a game ball. There was a proposal to attach it to the machine.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-221336

However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine in response to a command from the rent for the unit (card reading unit) side is only perform control to leave pay game medium, the game machine side, not controlled for rent unit. Therefore, as the gaming machine, the player is not able to determine whether a state of performing a game rented game media from the rent for the unit, there is a possibility that incorrect or the like is performed.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraud and the like.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, reads the value information to an external device provided in the gaming machine exterior is stored in a storage medium, a game machine in response to the read value information game based on the loan in accordance with the request signal are those having a dispensing means for paying out game media value information of the external device is read storage medium for requesting lending game media that will be output to the game machine against External signal receiving means for receiving an external signal to be output to the machine, valuable value information determining means for determining the valuable value information based on the information of the external signal output to the external signal receiving means, and the game. A game execution determination means for determining whether a game is being executed using a medium, and a game execution determination means for executing a game using the game medium for a predetermined period. During the period when it is determined that the valuable value information discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means has changed by a predetermined value or more, the payout means has paid out according to the lending request signal. The lending game determination means for determining whether a lending game, which is a game using a game medium, is being executed, and the lending game determination means for determining whether predetermined valuable value information is displayed, the lending Based on that the game determination means determines that a game different from the lending game is being executed, based on the notification means for executing a predetermined notification and the game being executed using the game medium, Performing an effect based on counting means for counting the game medium, count information by the counting means, and information on the game medium paid out to the player from the game machine. Directing execution means, and has a.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, an external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the valuable value information to the gaming machine in correspondence with the read valuable value information. The game machine has a payout means for paying out the game medium according to a lending request signal for requesting the game machine to lend the game medium, and outputs the game medium to the game machine based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device. An external signal receiving means for receiving an external signal, a valuable value information discriminating means for discriminating the valuable value information based on information of the external signal outputted to the external signal receiving means, and a game using the game medium. The game execution determination means for determining whether or not is being executed, and the game execution determination means determines that a game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period. During a certain period, it is determined whether the valuable value information discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means has changed by a predetermined value or more, and a game using the game medium dispensed by the dispensing means in accordance with the lending request signal. The lending game determination means for determining whether the lending game is being executed and the lending game determination means for determining whether the predetermined value information is displayed is determined by the lending game determination means. Based on the fact that it is determined that a different game is being executed, a notification means for executing a predetermined notification, and the game medium is counted based on the fact that the game has been executed using the game medium. Counting means, performance executing means for performing a performance based on the counting information by the counting means, and information on the game medium paid out to the player from the gaming machine, Those having.

Therefore, there is an effect that defects such as fraud can be suppressed .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the opening image at the time of the jackpot start of a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the card return fluctuation mode displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure showing a display mode of a password setting screen displayed on a display screen, and (b) is a figure showing a display mode of a password input screen displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure which showed the notification mode of the card insertion displayed on a display screen, (b) is a figure which showed the notification mode of the card balance displayed on a display screen. (A) is a figure showing a balance indicator, and (b) is a figure showing a frame button of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a connection between a card reading unit and a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing connection between a balance indicator and a card reading unit in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing connection between a return button and a card reading unit of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A)-(d) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing various counter values used by a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM of a main controller, (b) was the figure which showed the jackpot random number table, (c) showed the jackpot type table. It is a figure and (d) is a figure showing a random number table per universal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the card process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting production process which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hold change process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the card production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a card notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the card return production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the password input processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the password processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the break process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the structure at the time of locking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure at the time of unlocking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows shutter input processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a shutter process that is one process of a shutter setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 7B) is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. As shown in FIG. 7B, the frame button 22 is a decision button 22a, an up button 22b for mainly designating an upward direction, a left button 22c for mainly designating a left direction, and a downward direction mainly for designating. The downward direction button 22d and the rightward button for mainly designating the rightward direction are configured.

  The decision button 22a is, for example, a case of performing an operation of selecting (deciding with the entered password) a setting button displayed on the third symbol display device 81 on a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) described later, etc. Is operated by the player. The up button 22b, for example, in the password setting screen, moves up the selection image (the background color of the displayed number changes) showing the selected number for one digit of the password selected by the cursor. Move to. In addition, the down button 22d moves the selected image indicating the selected number in the downward direction. As will be described later, the password is composed of four-digit numbers, and by moving the cursor left or right with the right direction button 22c or the left direction button 22e, the digit for selecting the number is determined. When the player operates the left direction button 22c, the cursor moves one digit to the left. When the player operates the right direction button 22e, the cursor moves one digit to the right. In addition, the up button 22b, the left button 22c, the down button 22d, the right button 22e, for example, when moving the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up, down, left and right, the direction is specified to the player. You may comprise so that it may be used for it suitably.

  Further, on the front side of the upper plate 17, there is provided a break button 500 for setting that the card inserted in the card return unit 300 cannot be returned when the player takes a break. The break button 500 will be described later, but when the password is not set by the player operating (pressing) the break button 500, a password setting screen for setting the password (FIG. 5A). Is displayed to inform the player to set a password. Then, when the password is set, even if the return button 42 is pressed, the operation is set to the invalid state (invalidation). When the password has already been set (when the break button 500 is pressed to set the password, etc.), the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) is displayed and set. The return button 42 can be set valid (validated) by entering the password.

  In the present embodiment, when the break button 500 is operated, the return button 42 is invalidated by setting the password. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the break button 500 is pressed, , The return button 42 is forcibly disabled, a break flag indicating that a break is in progress is provided, the break flag is set to ON, and the pachinko machine 10 returns only when the break flag is ON. A return switch that can activate the button 42 may be provided at a position where the game store can operate. With such a configuration, the player can immediately go to a break by operating the break button 500, which facilitates the operation.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated, the ball lending button 43 may be configured to be invalidated, or the launch of the game ball may be prohibited. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem such as illegally lending a ball during a break or playing a game without permission by another person.

  Although the password is set by operating the break button 500, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return button 42 may be invalidated immediately by operating the break button 500. With such a configuration, a method of providing a break release button that can be operated by a clerk of the game shop on the back side of the game machine, inside the front frame 14 or the like, and calling the clerk to cancel the break can be considered.

  When the return button 42 is invalidated by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is invalidated until the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is initialized or the set password is input. However, the upper limit time may be set for the time when the return button 42 is invalidated. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the password is set unnecessarily and the return button 42 remains disabled for a long time.

  In addition, when the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated (for example, the third symbol display device 81 indicates “during break! The character "!" Is displayed). Further, the time when the return button 42 is invalidated may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily informed to the clerk of the gaming shop that the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is disabled. Therefore, even if there is a pachinko machine 10 in which the return button 42 has been invalidated and left for a long time, the clerk of the gaming shop can detect it early and release the invalidation of the return button 42. Then, the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 can be collected and managed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in a non-playing state for a long time and causing damage to the gaming shop side. In addition, if a preset time is set in advance and the return button 42 is invalidated for the preset time or longer, the fact that the return button 42 has been invalidated for the preset time or longer is notified. You may comprise. With this configuration, the gaming shop side can identify the pachinko machine 10 that has been disabled for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the return button 42 from being left invalidated.

  A human sensor 400 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17. The human sensor 400 is a sensor for detecting a player playing the pachinko machine 10 by using infrared rays. The human sensor 400 is turned on when a player is detected and outputs a signal to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the human sensor 400 is turned off and a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the text "Card is in!" Is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and voice output is performed. The device 226 outputs a voice message "card is inserted" (S1814 in FIG. 32).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card when the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300. Although not shown, this notification mode is stopped (erased) when the break button 500 is operated.

  In the present embodiment, the card notification process is executed immediately after the human sensor 400 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the human sensor is turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). You may comprise so that it may notify you, after progressing. With such a configuration, even if the player moves the body in front of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, shakes the body to the left or right) to temporarily turn off the motion sensor 400, the player can immediately turn it off. It is possible to prevent the notification from being executed, and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  Further, on the left side of the front frame 14 in front view, an insertion notification lamp 310 is provided to notify that a card is inserted in a card reading unit 300, which will be described later. The insertion notification lamp 310 has a triangular shape, and the apex of the triangle is arranged so as to point toward the card reading unit 300 so as to point to the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 300 is controlled so as to be turned on when a prepaid-type dedicated card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 310 is composed of a red LED and has a higher brightness than other light emitting means (LED).

  In this way, when the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the insertion notification lamp 310 lights up, so that the player can prevent forgetting that the card is being inserted into the card reading unit 300. . Further, since the light is turned on with a higher brightness than the other light emitting means, even when a game is being played, it is not noticed that the insertion notification lamp 310 is turned on by turning on the other light emitting means. You can prevent problems.

  In the present embodiment, the card reading unit 300 has been described as being limited to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card reading unit 300 may be disposed on either the left or right side. By providing 310 on the front view right side of the front frame 14 and providing a changeover switch or the like on the pachinko machine 10, the direction in which the card reading unit 300 is arranged is set on the pachinko machine 10 by the changeover switch, and the insertion notification is turned on. The lamp 310 may be configured to be set. Further, by providing a sensor or the like for detecting the card reading unit 300 on the side surface of the gaming machine, the direction of the card reading unit 300 in which the pachinko machine 10 is arranged may be automatically detected and set. Good. With such a configuration, even if the card reading units 300 are arranged in various ways, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the card is inserted, and forget that the player has inserted the card. It is possible to prevent it.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a balance indicator 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card reading unit 300 (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is lent according to the operation. Be seen. Specifically, the balance indicator 41 is an area where the balance information of the card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 43 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card. . The return button 42 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  The card reading unit 300 is for reading the data of the balance amount stored in the card, and a card insertion port 306 for inserting a card having a valuable value similar to money at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction thereof. Is provided. A card available lamp 301 is provided above the card insertion slot 306 and above the card reading unit 300. For example, the card available lamp 301 can insert a card into the card insertion slot 306. When the card cannot be inserted into the card insertion slot 306, it is turned off. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the card reading unit 300 can be used by visually recognizing the card available lamp 301.

  An amount setting button for setting the loan amount based on the balance amount data recorded on the card, which is located between the card insertion slot 306 and the card availability lamp 301 and above the card reading unit 300. 302 is provided, and the loan amount can be set to 100 yen, 200 yen, 300 yen or 500 yen by pressing the amount setting button 302. Note that the loan amount is usually set to 500 yen, and the payout of a ball P corresponding to a 100-yen rental ball (for example, 25 balls) is made five times (for example, 125 balls).

  A fraction display button 303 is arranged below the amount setting button 302. The fraction display button 303 is pressed to display the fraction on the balance display 41 when the balance amount stored in the card is less than the minimum lending amount (for example, 100 yen). .

  Below the fraction display button 303, a pair of upper and lower connecting stand direction display lamps 304 formed in a substantially triangular shape are arranged. The pair of connecting stand direction display lamps 304 are for indicating the arrangement (arrangement) direction of the pachinko machine 10 to which the card reading unit 300 is connected, and each has one LED built therein. ing. Therefore, for example, when the card reading unit 300 is connected to a pachinko machine (not shown) arranged side by side on the left side, the upper LED is turned on. A card insertion lamp 305 made up of one LED is disposed below the connecting table direction display lamp 304. The card insertion lamp 305 has a card inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The light is turned on when the card is present, and turned off when the card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card available lamp 301 and the connecting stand direction display lamp 304 are turned on when the power of the card reading unit 300 is turned on.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) that operates. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, so that the operation handle 51 rotates. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the operation amount, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  A ball-pulling button (ball-pulling lever) 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball-pulling button (ball-pulling lever) 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left against the urging force, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. After opening, the ball spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball-removing button (ball-removing lever) 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. .

  The ball-out button 52 is provided with a ball-out button sensor 52a (see FIG. 8) for detecting whether the slide operation has been performed. This ball removal button sensor 52a is composed of a limit sensor, and when the ball removal button 52 is operated to open the bottom opening of the lower plate 50, the ball removal button 52 is turned on. It is configured. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the player has operated the ball removal button 52. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol that is performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the big hit, a game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered spheres is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. And is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types. In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from after the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Further, in the case of "big hit B", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) from the end of the big hit to the next big hit.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called high probability state of the special symbol (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (15R It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to jackpot. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal symbol" (time saving of ordinary symbol) refers to a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol". Show.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. After that, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, when the big hit type is "big hit B", it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and shifts to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and if the big hit type is "big hit A", the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Until it is done, it will be in a high probability state of normal design.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an opening display mode for notifying the player of the start of the big hit game when the big hit game is started. Although details will be described later, when a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 and a jackpot game is started, the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 as shown in FIG. 4A. The characters "Please press the card return button!", Which is a display mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42 so that the card is ejected and returned to the player, is displayed.

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player, so that there is no need for a lending ball for a while, and during that time, the player reads the card reading unit 300. It is possible to prevent forgetting that the card is inserted in the card and forgetting to return the card after the game is over. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as forgetting to return the card, the card being stolen or lost. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball lending button 43 when he / she does not need the ball to unnecessarily reduce the card balance.

  The third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". The main symbol is composed of three columns of left, middle, and right, and when three stop symbols are displayed in the center with the same number, it indicates that the lottery result was a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed on the even-numbered grid of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8", the fact that the big hit A is won is notified, and "1, 3, 5, 7" is displayed. , 9 ”are arranged in an odd number, the player is informed that the jackpot B has been won.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the second symbol holding lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is composed of four LEDs. In the second design holding lamp 84, one LED is turned on per one holding ball number, and the number of holding balls is notified according to the number of lighting of the LED. That is, when one LED is turned on in the second symbol holding lamp 84, it means that the number of holding balls is one, and when four LEDs are turned on, the number of holding balls is four. Indicates that there is. Further, when the LED is not lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. The number may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, not only the second symbol holding lamp 84, but also the third symbol display device 81 may display a holding display symbol (for example, "●") to display the number of holdings.

  Further, the LED of the second symbol holding lamp 84 is configured to be able to switch and display both blue and red. Although it will be described in detail later, normally, it is lit in blue to inform the player of the number of holdings, but by holding the card in the card reading unit 300 and operating the return button 42, it is put on hold. When there is a hold for a lottery game that is a big win among the lottery games that are being held (as a result of prefetching, there is a big jackpot hold), the LED corresponding to the hold is changed from blue to red and lit and displayed.

  With such a configuration, by operating the return button 43, it is possible to obtain a bonus of the game (you can know the lottery result before the change of the third symbol), and the player can always return the button 43. It is possible to be aware of operating (pressing). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the state in which the card remains in the card reading unit 300, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  Further, the second pattern holding lamp 84 is changed from blue to red to notify the result of the prefetching, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by operating the return button 42, the result of the prefetching is hit within the pending state. If a hold is stored, the notification may be given again to insert the returned card. With this configuration, for example, when a special symbol hits, the winning opening having the blade opens, and when a special winning opening (V winning opening) provided inside the winning opening is won, the player In the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to be given a special bonus game, when a special symbol hits, a game ball is required, so prepare a game ball for the special symbol hit (ball lending Can be operated). Therefore, by operating the return button 42, an advantageous state can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus of the game obtained by operating the return button 43 is to notify the result of the lottery although it is withheld before the variable display of the third symbol is started, but it is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a two-dimensional image such as a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the two-dimensional code is read by a mobile phone or the like, so that the pachinko machine 10 It may be a privilege that allows the user to obtain the character used in, the voice of the character, and the like. Further, by operating the return button 43, it may be a privilege that can obtain information on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the number of jackpots and the balance of the day (balance)). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances that the player operates the return button 43, and prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and goes home.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a card return variation mode that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol starts the variable display and the reach state in which the left and right main symbols stop at the same symbol is reached, the player is instructed to operate the return button 42 by pressing the "card return button! Character is displayed. After that, when the player operates the return button 42 within a predetermined time, the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing, and "777", which is the display mode of the third symbol showing the big hit, is stopped and displayed. It

  With this configuration, if the player is inserting a card into the card reading unit 300, by operating the return button 42, the determination result of the lottery game is displayed at the operation timing. Therefore, the player himself can have a feeling that he has stopped the jackpot pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card by operating the return button 42 with special expectations. Also, in the case of a variation mode that is a jackpot, by determining and executing the card return variation mode, it is not necessary to lend the ball for the time being, so be sure to remove the card from the player. Can be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a password setting screen and an input screen for setting invalidation and activation of the return button 42 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, and a special symbol (third symbol) is changed for a predetermined time or more in a state where the password is not set yet. If the stopped state (the state where the game ball does not enter the first entrance 64) continues for (30 seconds or more in the present embodiment), the password setting screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the password setting screen displays the characters "please set password" to inform the player that the password setting screen is displayed. Then, the characters "1 to 5" for setting a 4-digit password are displayed below each character for each digit. A cursor indicating the selected digit is displayed in a triangular display mode, and the digit displayed on the left side of the cursor indicates the digit whose number can be selected at present. Then, the background color of the number indicated by the cursor is displayed in a color different from the other background colors (for example, the normal background color is blue, and a white background is selected). By operating the frame button 22, the cursor moves up, down, left, and right, and the player operates the enter button 22a by designating an arbitrary 4-digit password, and the designated password is stored in the pachinko machine 10 ( Is set).

  Further, in FIG. 5B, when the password for invalidating the return button 42 is already set, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time or more (5 seconds or more in the present embodiment). If not, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character string "Please enter the password" is displayed to inform that the password input screen is displayed, and the password input screen is displayed as in the password setting screen.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a card insertion notification display mode for notifying that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, this card insertion notification display mode is irrelevant to the state of the gaming machine (state of whether a game is being played) at regular intervals on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed without In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to be displayed for 5 seconds every 30 seconds.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a card balance display mode for notifying the player of the card balance displayed after the card insertion notification display mode is displayed. The amount information is displayed based on the card balance. This card balance display mode is displayed for 5 seconds after the card insertion notification display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed. Then, 30 seconds later, the card insertion notification display mode is displayed and then displayed again. That is, the card balance display mode is also displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds. In addition, when the balance display mode is equal to or more than a predetermined amount (3000 yen or more in the present embodiment), the display mode normally displayed in blue is displayed in red.

  With such a configuration, only when the amount of money is more than a certain amount, the color is displayed in a conspicuous character, so that the player can be made aware that a card with a large amount of remaining balance is inserted. Therefore, the remaining balance can be easily known. Further, since the balance display is not always displayed in a prominent color, it is possible to prevent the balance display from interfering with the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are configured to be displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a cycle of 60 seconds, for example, and is appropriately set. It may be a cycle. In addition, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are not displayed in the game state (for example, a state in which the variable display mode of a specific special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, etc.). By the insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the balance display mode is configured to change the character color when the card balance is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character size (font) may be changed or the character may be changed. The display may blink.

  In the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the special symbol is drawn by using it as a trigger, and then the special symbol (first symbol display device 37) Variable display of (pattern) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command to the voice lamp controller 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device. The variable display of the third symbol is performed according to the variable display of 37.

  When the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds) When elapses, the display switches to the medium speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect is ended, and subsequently, the big hit effect is started. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are not aligned is displayed, the variable effect is finished, and if there is a pending start prize, While the next special symbol is drawn, the next variation effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods, a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and the game value (a high probability state of the special symbol or a high probability state of the normal symbol) given to the player after the jackpot is over. ) Is notified to the player, or it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol that has been held (performing a finalized effect display).

  In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize hole in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, the electric symbols are usually a big hit and the electric accessory is opened, and the balls enter the first prize. The number of prize balls increases as the ball 64 easily enters. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the ordinary symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a during opening of the opening 65a. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. The command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction. Further, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are configured to bidirectionally transmit commands.

  In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  For the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of the special symbol and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, special initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, A fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection is used. In addition, the random symbol counter C4 is usually used for lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

  The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a jackpot of the special symbol is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (FIG. 10A), which will be described later and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , Reaches a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), and then returns to 0. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, a display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Aspect becomes a special big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Each data stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the ROM 202, the big hit random number table 202a, the big hit type table 202b, the normal symbol random number table 202c, the big hit variation pattern table 202d, the deviation pattern table 202e, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the normal symbol stop type command 202g are provided respectively.

  The big hit random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 10B, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the hit counter value for performing the hit determination. It is a set data table. When the probability of a special symbol is low (normal game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to one, and specifically, "7" is a hit counter that is determined to be a big hit. It is set to a value. In addition, at the time of high probability of special symbols (probability variation game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to 10, and specifically, "0 to 9" is determined to be a big hit. The hit counter value is set.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the jackpot type table 202b is a hit counter in which the hit of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64 is a hit. When the value is a value, it is a data table for determining whether the type of the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance 64, if the value of the special bonus type counter CS2 acquired is any of "0-49", the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot) It is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired special winning type counter CS2 is any one of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R probability variation jackpot) is determined.

  The normal symbol per random number table 202c is, as shown in FIG. 10 (d), the normal per random number counter C4 acquired when the game ball passes through the second entrance 67, and the hit counter value for making a win / fail judgment. Is a data table in which is set. When the probability of the normal symbol is low (normal game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, which is determined as a hit, is set to "5 to 28". In addition, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (time saving game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be a hit is set to "5 to 204".

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d is a variation pattern that is selected as the variation display mode of the third symbol when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a jackpot, and a plurality of jackpots based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. From the variable display mode for jackpot (dynamic display mode for jackpot), one variable display mode for jackpot is determined.

  The variation pattern table for detachment 202e is data in which a plurality of detachment variation patterns (displacement dynamic display aspect) selected as the variation display mode of the third symbol are stored when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out. It's a table. The deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  By the stop type selection counter C3, the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach out" (e.g. 98, 99) and "reach other than out-of-front / outer reach" (e.g. in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after "reach" occurs and "reach does not occur" Three stop (effect) patterns of "off" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

In the deviation variation pattern table 202e, a plurality of variation patterns are set for the variation mode determined by the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns and acquired. One deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The variation pattern table 202f of the ordinary symbol is a data table in which the variation pattern for the low probability of the ordinary symbol and the variation pattern for the high probability of the ordinary symbol, and the variation pattern of deviation are stored respectively. The variation pattern for the low probability of the normal symbol is the variation pattern of the hit variation and the deviation pattern, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. In addition, the variation pattern for the high probability of the normal symbol, both the variation pattern of the hit variation and the variation pattern of the deviation, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. As for the variation pattern of this ordinary symbol, a variation pattern of one type is set for both the low probability and high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202g is for setting whether to turn on either "○" or "x" as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. It is a command. If the result of the judgment whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is a hit, the stop type command 202g of the normal symbol for turning on "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is set. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the normal symbol is out, the stop type command 202g of the regular symbol for turning on the "x" indicating the disengagement of the regular symbol is set.

  In addition, when the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol, if the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, the first entrance 64 is "0.2 seconds × It will be opened only once. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, when the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very long as “3 seconds → 30 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the release of the first entrance 64 Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the ordinary hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, an hour / hour counter 203f, a card balance storage area 203g, and another storage area 203h.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a special winning random number counter C1, The respective values of the special winning type counter C2 and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, a hit, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the result of winning / deciding from the prize information command and stores it as the prize information in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 233.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is mainly reserved for the special symbol to the player in the pending change processing (FIG. 30, S1608) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. It is used to notify if there is a big jackpot on hold. Further, in the present embodiment, it is used to notify whether or not there is a jackpot that is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variation patterns and stop types as prize information are also stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It may be stored and notified about the holding of the special symbol to be the reach, or may be appropriately used for other effects and the like.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for hitting a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 of FIG. 16).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 16, see S405 of FIG. 18). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a variable display holding ball held by the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and holds the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 turns on the holding sphere number pattern of the second symbol display device 83 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 19).

  When the sphere passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, ordinary random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 on either the left or right, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. Not performed (S603: No in FIG. 20).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). This probability variation flag 203e, in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot type is a jackpot. If it is determined to be B, it is set to ON (S213 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, after that, when it is determined that the jackpot type A, it is set to OFF (S214 in FIG. 16). The probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Further, it is configured to be backed up in the event of power failure.

  The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. In this time saving counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, the main control device 110 performs a special symbol lottery, and when the special symbol determined to be a big hit is stopped and displayed, the big hit type is a big hit A. If so, 100 is set to the hour / hour counter (S214 in FIG. 16).

  The card balance storage area 203g is a storage area in which information on the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is stored based on the card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The card balance storage area 203g stores an initial value of 0 when the RAM 203 is initialized. If there is a difference between the balance information indicated by the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicated by the received card extraction signal and the value of the card balance storage area 203g, the value of the card balance storage area 203g is based on the received card extraction signal. It is updated with the value of the balance information.

  It should be noted that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when the card balance storage area 203g stores balance information with a value greater than 0. Further, the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicating that the card is not inserted (in the present embodiment, the first LED 41a is "-", the second LED 41b is "-", and the third LED 41c is "-". When a card extraction signal indicating "displayed" is received, an initial value 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g.

  The other storage area 203h is a storage area in which various other counter values necessary when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 and other flags are appropriately stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the extraction signal line of the balance indicator 41, the card reading unit 300, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the balance indicator 41 for displaying the card balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is configured by arranging three 7-segment LEDs in a line, and the balance of the balance of 40 It is a 7-segment LED indicating the rank, a first LED 41a arranged on the left side, a 7-segment LED indicating the thousands position of the balance, a second LED 41b arranged in the center, and a 7-segment LED indicating the hundreds position of the balance. The third LED 41c is arranged on the right side. Each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments, that is, segment Ma to segment Mg, and one signal line is connected to each segment so that each segment can be turned on independently. .

  The signal line connecting the card reading unit 300 and the balance indicator 41 is provided with extraction means (LDa to LDc) (phototransistors in this embodiment) for extracting signals for lighting the respective segments. Each signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signal input to the input / output port 215 to the main control device 110 to control the signal of the same content as it is at every execution cycle (every 2 ms in this embodiment). Is configured to.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the main control device 110 with the same content as that input to the input / output port 215. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may be configured to generate a dedicated command based on each input signal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, seven signal lines are connected from the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the payout control device 202, and a total of 21 signal lines are connected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an IC to which the signal output from each of the extracting means (LDa to LDc) is input is provided, and the seven signal lines commonly output from each IC are connected to the payout control device 111. The payout control device 111 is provided with a chip selector for designating the IC, and three signal lines connected to each IC from the chip selector are connected. Therefore, 10 signal lines are connected from the IC to the payout control device 111, and the number of signal lines connected to the payout control device 111 can be reduced. The IC may be provided on the relay board or the like, or may be provided on the board of the balance indicator 41. When the balance indicator 41 is provided on the substrate, it can be connected to each IC by a printed line, and the labor of connecting a harness can be reduced. Further, an IC may be provided in the payout control device 202 to reduce the number of harnesses between the main control device 201 and the payout control device 111.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is a condition that the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). Then, the firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). The display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display, is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the password is input and set, and the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Alternatively, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a control program and the like necessary for the MPU 221 to execute control, and various data. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a sub card information storage area 223e, and a return. At least a lock flag 223f, a handle counter 223g, a password storage area 223h, a subordinate return button flag 223i, a lottery counter 223j, a card return effect flag 223k, a customer waiting counter 223m, and another storage area 223n are provided. ing.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start winning, from the respective values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning, Various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the various predicted information is mainly The control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, the result of winning / decision determination is extracted as prize information from the various information notified by the prize information command, and the prize information is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Memorized in. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 28). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to light the holding ball number symbol in the second symbol display device 83.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 29). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1616 in FIG. 29).

  The slave card information storage area 223e receives the card information command (see S704 in FIG. 21) output by the main control device 110 based on the signal extracted by the extracting means (LDa to LDc). A storage area for storing the card balance indicated by the card information command. This sub card information storage area 223e is set to 0 when the gaming machine is initialized.

  The return lock flag 223f is a flag, which will be described later, indicating whether the return button 42 is set to be valid (whether it is valid) or not (is invalid). When the card is not returned from the card reading unit 300 even if the return button 42 is invalidated and the player operates the return button 42, the return lock flag 223f is set to ON. On the other hand, when the return button 42 is activated and the player operates the return button 42 to return the card from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the return button 42 is activated and set, and the return lock flag 223f is turned off.

  The handle counter 223g is a counter that is incremented (updated) by 1 when the player releases the operation handle 51 (the handle sensor 51a is off) (see S1809 in FIG. 32). The value of the handle counter 223g is reset to 0 when the handle sensor 51a is turned on. That is, the handle count 223g is a counter for measuring the time when the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, and the value of the counter can determine the time when the player has released his / her hand from the operation handle 51. it can.

  The password storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a password for switching invalidation and activation of the return button 42. Although details will be described later, a 4-digit password arbitrarily determined by the player operating the frame button 22 on the password setting screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored (see S2023 in FIG. 35). ). On the other hand, when the password is stored in the password storage area 223h, the same as the password stored in the password storage area 223g by operating the frame button 22 on the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the password is input, it is reset to 0 (S2029 in FIG. 35). The password storage area 223h stores 0, which is the initial state when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. In addition, when power is cut off, it is backed up.

  In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is configured to be reset. Therefore, if the player forgets the password, the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by calling the clerk of the game store. The card can be returned by being converted. In this embodiment, the password is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, but the invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated password initialization switch may be provided. The password initialization switch can be prevented from being illegally initialized by being configured so that it can be initialized by operating the key with the key on the game shop side. Further, by providing the dedicated initialization switch, it is not necessary to initialize the pachinko machine 10, and the password can be initialized without initializing the gaming state and the like. Therefore, the password can be initialized and the return button 42 can be validated even in a state where it is disadvantageous to the player if the pachinko machine 10 during the big hit or the probability variation game is initialized. Therefore, the card can be returned to the player at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  The subordinate return button flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON when the return button 42 is operated in a state where the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is enabled (FIG. 31). S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 has not been operated, it is set to off (see S1710 in FIG. 31). With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether the player has operated the return button 42 to return the card inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  When the variation display mode of the special symbol received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot variation display mode, the lottery counter 223j has a card inserted and the return button 42 is activated, It is a counter value for determining whether to execute the return variable display mode. The lottery counter 223j is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”, and if the acquired counter value is any of “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a win and the return variation display mode is set. To be done. The lottery counter 223j is incremented by 1 each time the command output process (FIG. 26, S1302) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The value is updated to 0. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the lottery counter 223j is set to 0 which is an initial value.

  Although the details will be described later, the return variation display mode is, as shown in FIG. 4B, a variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a variation output from the main control device 110. This is a variable display mode dedicated to changing the display mode of the variable display mode by allowing the player to operate the return button 42 in the middle of the variable display mode, which is different from the variable display mode indicated by the pattern command. This return fluctuation display mode is set with the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation display mode indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110.

  The card return effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the return variation display mode is determined. The card return effect flag 223k is set to ON when the return variation display mode is determined (S1613 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the variation display mode indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not the jackpot variation display mode. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The customer waiting counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the lottery game is not executed). The customer waiting counter 223m is updated one by one based on the fact that the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S1402 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the initial value 0 is reset. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The other storage area 223n is a storage area in which various other data necessary for the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various controls of the pachinko machine 10 and other various flags are stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 28) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  To the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, a return signal output from the return button 42 for returning the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 provided on the front frame 14 to the card reading unit is sent. The return extraction signal extracted by the return extraction means 42a is input.

  Further, the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 also receives signals from the ball removal button sensor 52a that detects the operation of the ball removal button 52, the motion sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14, and the break button 500, respectively. It is configured to be input.

  The electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 connect a connector composed of a plurality of signal lines from the card reading unit 300 to a card reading unit connection board (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Electrically connected by. As shown in FIG. 11, the power supply of the signal necessary for exchanging between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 is the voltage (DC24V) generated by the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is supplied to the card reading unit 300 side. The supplied voltage is input to the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 to generate a DC18V voltage (VL) from the input DC24V and output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the card reading unit connection board. To do.

  The DC 18V voltage (VL) output from the card reading unit 300 is used as a drive voltage for the ball lending LED 40a, the balance indicator 41, and a phototransistor for extracting a signal in the pachinko machine 10, and It is also used as a signal for the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the connection with the card reading unit 300. Further, although not shown, the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 generates each voltage necessary for the operation of each unit of the card reading unit 300 in addition to the voltage (VL) of DC18V, and each unit of the card reading unit 300. Supply to.

  Although not shown, the card reading unit 300 is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. This MPU has a ROM, which is a non-volatile memory that stores various control programs executed by the MPU, fixed value data, and the like, and various data temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. In addition to a RAM for temporarily storing, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. A bus line composed of an address bus and a data bus is connected to this MPU, and this bus line is connected to the input / output port N1 shown in FIG. In addition to this bus line, a card available lamp 301, an amount setting button 302, a fraction display button 303, a connection direction display lamp 304, a card insertion lamp 306, and a card insertion slot 306 are inserted into the input / output port N1. A reader / writer (not shown) for reading a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) is connected.

  This reader / writer is provided with a magnetic head and the like having a reader function for reading money amount information and the like from a card inserted in the card insertion 306 and a writer function for writing money amount information of the balance amount after use to the card. ing. When the reader / writer reads out the amount information of the balance amount of the inserted card, it is determined that the card is being inserted. Further, when the amount of the balance newly written in the card by the reader / writer becomes “0”, the card inserted from the card insertion slot 306 is forcibly forced from the card insertion slot 306 by the actuator (not shown). Is discharged.

  The card reading unit 300 outputs a signal for turning on each of the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 to three phototransistors S1 and seven phototransistors S2. Is output to the pachinko machine 1 side at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1 ms). For example, when the ball lending button 43 is operated and a ball for 500 yen is paid out, when the payout is completed, the signal is switched so that the balance display is turned on with a display subtracting 500 yen.

  The three phototransistors S1 are provided corresponding to the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, respectively. In addition, the seven phototransistors S2 are provided corresponding to the respective seven segments Ma to Mg that form the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c.

  For example, if the phototransistor S2 corresponding to the segment Md is turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the hundreds first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the LED of the segment Md of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on. Lights up. That is, "-" is displayed on the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 (see FIG. 7). Further, if all the seven phototransistors S2 are turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the tenth second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the seven segments Ma of the second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 are displayed. All Mg lights up, and "8" is displayed on the second LED 41b.

  FIG. 12 shows that the signals output from the card reading unit 300 in order to turn on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 in FIG. 11 are extracted by the phototransistors LDa to LDc (extracting means). It is a block diagram showing a configuration of (branching) and outputting to an input / output port 215 of a payout control device 111. The phototransistors LDa to LDc used here are provided with a resistor on the collector side, and prevent a problem that a current flowing from the collector to the emitter becomes too large and short-circuits. The emitter side is connected to the ground. Further, in the present embodiment, the emitter side is connected to the ground, and the current is drawn to activate the signal. However, as shown as a modified example of the phototransistors LDa to LDc in FIG. A signal may be activated by applying a current to the device 111 side.

  The phototransistor LDa is for extracting (branching) the signals for lighting the respective segments Ma to Mg of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 14, and corresponding to each of the seven segments Ma to Mg. There are 7 in total, one for each.

  The phototransistor LDb corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the second LED 41b, and the phototransistor LDc corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the third LED 41c, respectively, like the phototransistor LDa, in total. Seven are provided each. The phototransistors LDa to LDc are respectively provided on the LED substrates on which the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 are provided. In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the extraction means, but the extraction means is not particularly limited thereto, and any other device capable of extracting a signal may be used. For example, it may be one that detects whether a current flows due to a change in the magnetic field from the outside of the signal line, or one that directly branches the signal electrically and detects it.

  In this way, the phototransistors LDa to LDc extract (branch) the lighting signals of the respective segments Ma to Mg, and the phototransistors LDa to LDc transmit signals by light, so that there is no electrical wiring. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized electrical signal from being output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage caused by a fraudulent act made by illegally changing the electrical wiring. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 1 are connected (signal transmission / reception) via a photodiode, so that the card reading unit 300 does not transmit / receive an illegal electrical signal. Moreover, since the pachinko machine 10 side receives the signal output from the card reading unit 300 by using the photodiode, the photodiode of the phototransistor cannot be turned on from the pachinko machine 10 side, and the pachinko machine 10 side. It is difficult to output an illegal signal from the side to the card reading unit 300 side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an illegal signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In the card reading unit 300, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, power is supplied from the pachinko machine 10 to the power supply circuit on the card unit 300 side via the power supply device 115, and each device of the card reading unit 300 is supplied. The power circuit supplies the required power. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit, the card reading unit 300 starts up based on a predetermined program, and when the normal control becomes possible, the player is informed that the card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card available lamp 300 for notification is turned on. When a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306, the card is read to see if it is normal. If it is normal, the card insertion lamp 305 is turned on and the card based on the balance inserted in the balance indicator 41 is read. Controlled to display balance. The lighting control of the balance indicator 41 is as described above. Further, the operation of the ball lending button 43 and the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be acceptable (a state in which the received signal is judged to be valid).

  From the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, a unit preparation signal BO for indicating to the pachinko machine 10 that the card reading unit 300 is in the ball lending state, from the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, In order to turn on the lending instruction completion signal YQ, which is a signal indicating the ball lending execution request and the ball lending execution instruction, and the ball lending possible LED 40a provided to the player, which is provided in the front frame 14, and which notifies the player that the ball lending is possible. The ball lending lighting signal RO and the like are output to the pachinko machine 10.

  Also, from the pachinko machine 10 to the card reading unit 300, a pachinko machine side preparation signal PO indicating to the card reading unit 300 that the pachinko machine 10 is in a ball lending state, and a lending output from the card reading unit 300 A ball lending completion signal ED indicating a response to the ball lending execution request of the instruction completion signal YQ and the end of the ball lending operation (end of ball lending payout) performed in response to the ball lending execution instruction of the lending instruction completion signal YQ, The card return signal HS output based on the operation of the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14, and the ball lending operation signal KS output based on the operation of the ball lending button 43 There is.

  The electrical connection between the card return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. On the pachinko machine 10 side, the return extraction means 42a (phototransistor) extracts the return extraction signal from the card return signal HS, and inputs the extracted signal to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Has become. Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, a photo MOS relay is provided as a changeover switch (switching means) 42b on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a, and a signal output from the voice lamp control device 113 The signal line between the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is configured to be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state. In the present embodiment, the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 to the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b is active, the return button 42 is activated, that is, the signal line is connected. In the inactive state, the return button 42 is disabled, that is, the signal line is set to the disconnected state.

  Between the return extraction means (phototransistor) 42a and the changeover switch (photoMOS relay) 42b, the voice lamp control device 113 activates the card return signal HS even when the return button 42 is not operated. It is configured to receive the forced return signal. The return extraction means 42a and the changeover switch b are provided on the same board, and are connected to the return button 42 and provided on the front frame 14.

  In this way, the card return signal HS output from the return button 42 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be extractable, so it is possible to determine whether the player has operated the card return button 42. In addition, since the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 can be switched between the disconnected state and the connected state by the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 by the changeover switch 42b, the return button 42 is disabled. It can be set by switching between activation and activation. Therefore, even if a player is playing a game with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300, by disabling the card return button 42, the problem that the card is stolen can be prevented.

  Further, the return button 42 is electrically and directly connected to the card reading unit 300 provided outside the pachinko machine 10, but the control device of the pachinko machine 10 of the return button 42 (in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113). ) Is connected via a phototransistor, and is not directly electrically connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized electric signal from being output from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to the control device of the pachinko machine 10 via the return button 42. Further, the changeover switch 42b is also constituted by a photo MOS relay, thereby preventing direct electrical connection with the control device to the outside. Also, by using the phototransistor, it is possible to transmit a one-way signal that is output from the side that lights the diode of the phototransistor. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being output to one side.

  In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the return extraction unit 42a, but the return extraction unit 42a is not limited to this, and any other unit may be used as long as it can detect ON / OFF of a signal. Further, although the photo-MOS relay is used as the changeover switch 42b in the embodiment, the changeover switch 42b is not limited to this and may be a relay or the like. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the return extraction signal is configured to be input to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other control boards such as the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 may be input. It may be configured to input.

  FIG. 14A is a block diagram simply showing the electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 1 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, whether a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, information about the card balance, a signal for turning on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 is extracted and paid out. It is configured to output to the control device 111. Instead, in Modification 1, the signal is output to main controller 110. Further, the control signal relating to the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is also output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether or not the ball lending is possible based on the control signal output from the payout control device 111, and outputs the pachinko-side preparation signal PO and the like to the card reading unit 300. ing. Further, when the MPU of the main control device 110 receives the control signal from the card reading unit 300, it outputs a signal corresponding to the signal to the payout control device 111.

  Further, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the balance information of the card. Then, based on the discriminated information, the same notification processing as in the first embodiment is executed. With this configuration, the card insertion information and the card balance information are directly input to the main control device 110, so that the control can be promptly performed.

  In the present embodiment, the control signal relating to the ball lending output by the card reading unit 300 is output to the main control device 110. Alternatively, only the signals output from the transistors LDa to LDc may be output to main controller 110. With this configuration, the ball lending control can be performed by the payout control device 111 regardless of an instruction from the main control device 110, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 2 of the first embodiment. In the second modification, a control signal regarding the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, and a signal extracted from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is a voice signal. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 directly receives the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates the card information based on the received signal. By performing the same notification as in the first embodiment, main controller 110 does not need to perform control for notification, and the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, since the control signal is not output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110, the signal output from the card reading unit 300 is not output to the main control device 110, and thus fraud can be reduced. .

  In the present embodiment, the control signal relating to the ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the voice lamp control device 113, but the signal relating to the ball lending is the same as in the first embodiment. As the configuration for outputting to 111, only the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc may be output to the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to output a control signal relating to the ball lending to the payout control device 111, and the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 2D is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 3 of the first embodiment. In Modification 3, after the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output to the payout control device 111, the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output from the payout control device 111 to the audio lamp control device 113. This is different from the first embodiment in that the signal shown is output. With this configuration, since the signal output from the payout control device 111 is not output to the main control device 110, it is possible to suppress fraud with respect to the main control device 110. In addition, the signal indicating the signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is output to the voice lamp control device 113 without passing through the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the card information, and the first embodiment is performed. Since the notification similar to that of the embodiment is executed, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, an enclosed pachinko machine (a pachinko machine in which a game ball is not paid out directly to a player and a game is carried out with the game ball stored in the game machine). Can also be used. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 extracts the card information of the card reading unit 300 and uses it not only for notification and presentation but also for outputting to a hall computer or a management computer is conceivable.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 using a card is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a prepaid medium in which money amount information (value of value) is stored. For example, a reading unit that uses a coin having a built-in IC chip, a stick, or the like, which is a (valuable value storage medium), can be used.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, by using the card reading unit 300, it is possible to use it for a slot gaming machine (rotating gaming machine) for lending medals. Is.

  Further, as another configuration, as will be described later in detail, an optical sensor for detecting the light amount of the 7-segment LED of the balance indicator 41 is provided in the frame body of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal of the optical sensor is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the card information may be notified by inputting into the. The balance information of the card information is stored in advance in correspondence with the amount of light quantity corresponding to the balance display, and the balance is determined based on the detected light quantity, or the light sensor is changed to an image recognition sensor to perform image recognition. Thus, the balance of the card may be detected by recognizing the balance display. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from outputting a signal for performing fraud via the card reading unit 300. Further, since the control can be executed based on the information actually displayed, more accurate notification can be performed. As for detecting the balance display, by detecting from the back side or the top side of the LED display, or from the surroundings, the sensor is not arranged on the front side, so that the visibility of the balance display of the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the first embodiment will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol (third symbol) in the third symbol display device 81. It is for controlling a variable display (fluctuation effect) and the like. Since this display control device 114 is already well known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

  Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (each 399 in the present embodiment). , 99, 99, 239), each of them is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. After the through-gate passage process is executed, a card process is executed (S108), then a firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110). Terminate the timer interrupt process. Note that the card process, which will be described in detail later, executes various processes for setting information of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. Further, the firing control process is performed on the condition that the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. , Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off the firing of a ball. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104), first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is in a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the special symbol, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether to be A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S211), and the jackpot type. If is a big hit A, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S213). Then, the big hit start of the special symbol is set (S215), and this processing is ended. When the big hit start of the special symbol is set by the process of S215, the big hit control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired ( S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the probability variation If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols.

  When the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, so the probability variation in-progress judgment execution flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the process proceeds to S304. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that are big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S305). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability one by one. As the random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number value for these hits match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S304 or S305 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and when it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (bonus A, jackpot) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A (15R normal big hit, 100 times of shortening time), and is set in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is, it is determined to be a big hit B (15R probability variation big hit) (see FIG. 10C).

  In the process of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern (variation display mode) at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. For example, the variation patterns for disengagement are defined as "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", and "disconnection special reach". ing.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach, or complete outreach is set.

  Here, the stop type is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98 , 99 ”, the out-of-front / rear reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 by checking the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is set (S311). Next, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24, S1000). Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reservation number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to the special value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, for the various counters acquired in the process of S406, based on the gaming state at the start of variation (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state), the judgment result of the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern selected Look-ahead of the lottery result in the special symbol for predicting (S407).

  By the processing of S407, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the result of winning / deciding from the prize information command and stores the information as prize information in the corresponding area of the prize information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S501). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of fluctuation display holdings in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S509). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  In the process of S509, if it is not in the special symbol big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the random symbol per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary is compared with the random number value stored in the random table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low probability. Based on the random symbol per regular symbol for time, the lottery result of whether or not the regular symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 10D).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the first entrance opening The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds and the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops in the second symbol display device 83. The display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) in the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the normal symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and the present process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the card processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this card processing (S108). This card process (S108) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is generated based on the extraction signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) output from the payout control device 111. This is a process for determining the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 from the card extraction signal and notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the determined information.

  In the card process (FIG. 21, S108), first, based on the card extraction signal output by the payout control device 111 received in the process of S1003 of the main process (S1000 of FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, The display information of the balance indicator 41 is acquired (analyzed) (S701). It is determined whether there is a change in the card balance based on the value stored in the card balance storage area 203g and the display information acquired in the processing of S701 (S702). When it is determined that the card balance has changed (S702: Yes), the balance information based on the acquired display information is stored (updated) in the card balance storage area 203g (S703). A card information command based on the card balance information stored in the card balance storage area 203g is generated (S704). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no change in the card balance (S702: No), this process ends.

  The card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111 is an 8-bit signal formed of eight signal lines and input to the input / output port of the main control device 110. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 discriminates the input card extraction signal composed of 8 bits to discriminate the display information of the balance indicator 41. The card information command generated by the main controller 110 is composed of a 2-byte command, the upper byte is composed of a command indicating the type of command (it is a command indicating the card balance), and the lower byte is composed of It is composed of a command indicating the card balance.

  Regarding the card extraction signal, seven signal lines are respectively input from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, but are output to the main control device 110. The card extraction signal is composed of an 8-bit signal. This is because when the balance display unit 41 displays an error indicating the upper 1 bit, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 outputs the error by setting the bit to ON and outputting the card. It is configured so that it can be easily identified that it is an extracted signal. The signals extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc are set in the other 7 bits. That is, the total number of signal lines connected from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the payout control device 111 is 21, and the number of card extraction signals input from the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 is 8. Signal line. The payout control device 111 can identify the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c based on the signals input from the extraction units LDa to LDc, respectively, with the remaining 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit, and the lighting mode of each segment. Generate a distinguishable signal. For example, the light emission mode of each LED is a number 0-9 and a light emission mode indicating an error display (for example, "A") and "-" indicating that a card is not inserted. 2 bits are used to indicate the type of LED (one of the first LED 41a to the third LED 41c), and the remaining 5 bits are used to form a signal corresponding to the light emission mode of the segment. Also, as described above, the upper 1 bit is set to ON when the light emission mode indicates an error.

  In the present embodiment, although omitted, in the card processing, when the card extraction signal indicating that the display indicating the error is displayed on the balance display 41 is received, the signal indicating the error is output to the hall computer externally. It is configured to output via a terminal (not shown). Further, the type of error display displayed on the balance display 41 may be determined and an error signal corresponding to the error type may be output to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal. With such a configuration, if the player attempts to lend a ball using a counterfeit bill, for example, the card reading unit 300 can display an error display corresponding to the error display on the balance display 41. The illegality can be detected and dealt with by the game store side without being noticed by the player.

  In this way, the signal for causing the card reading unit 300 to turn on the balance indicator 41 is extracted by the extracting means LDa to LDc, and the information is output to the main control device 110 via the payout control device 111 as a card extraction signal. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can determine whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the information. Further, when there is a card balance, the amount of money can be accurately determined and the voice lamp control device 113 can be accurately notified of the card balance. Further, even when the card balance changes, the card reading unit 300 newly displays the card balance on the balance display unit 41, so that the information based on the display is notified to the main controller 110. Based on the information, a new card information command can be generated and notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, based on the value of the card balance storage area 203g, in the special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 17, S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is configured to select the type of jackpot variation pattern or out-of-range variation pattern. May be. By configuring in this way, for example, when the card balance becomes small, it is easy to select a variation pattern of super reach with a high probability of being selected in the case of a hit such as out-of-order super reach, so that the hit may be close. By asking the player to expect, even after the card balance has been exhausted, more money can be added to allow the player to play the game. Also, when the card balance is large (more than the set value), it is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is easily selected, so that the player can play games efficiently and the card balance is When the number becomes smaller (less than the set value), it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. The variation pattern that is easily selected may be configured to be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting a big hit while shortening the game time.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the controller is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) and the start winning process (see FIG. 18) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. In addition, the winning information command set in S408 of the starting winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the card extraction signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the card extraction signal based on the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) from the signal that the card reading unit 300 lights the balance display 41. In this embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) as they are to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal. Next, in the case of the special symbol big hit state, the big hit effect is executed, and the big hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a special symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the special symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variable display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the symbol display device 37. Start. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the special symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) ends, the first symbol display device 37. In the display mode set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) or the process of S309, the variable symbol that is being executed in the first symbol display device is displayed as the stop symbol (the first symbol). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed at 37.

  Next, a normal symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the normal symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the regular symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. . As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the normal symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). indicate.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the special time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number The initial value of the counter C1 and the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 25, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), the power-off process in S1318 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1318 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1320 of FIG. 26). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is a case where processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached through the processing of S1204 and S1206. If only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed from the start of the main process or the process of S1301 this time (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1311, the variable display setting processing of S1312, and the processing of updating the counter value in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1317 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, with reference to FIG. 27, as will be described later in detail, a process for executing the setting of the password setting screen and the password input screen for switching the activation and deactivation of the return button 42 is also executed. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not each operation button of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect or control process corresponding to the case. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 ends, the card effect control process is executed (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31, but when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and when the jackpot start is set, A process for determining whether the card is forcibly ejected or the return button 42 is operated is executed.

  When the process of S1313 is executed, a card notification process is executed to execute the process of preventing the forgetting to return the card information from the card reading unit 300 and the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300 ( S1314). The details of the card notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

  When the process of S1314 is executed, when the return variable display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the return button 42 is operated (pressed down) based on the display control device 114. Then, the card return effect process for executing the process of displaying the confirmation notification mode is executed (S1315). The details of the card return effect process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1315 is executed, in the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for switching between the validation and the invalidation of the return button 42, based on the operation of the frame button 22, the control regarding the password input A password input process for executing is executed (S1316). Details of the password input process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is executed, when the player operates the break button 500, a break process of executing the process of invalidating the return button 42 is executed (S1317). Details of the break process (S1317) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1318: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305). This customer waiting effect process (S1305) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, a predetermined time after the special symbol fluctuates and stops. After a lapse of time, the process for displaying the password input screen or the password setting screen for validating and invalidating the return button 42 on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped (that is, the lottery game is not being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401). When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: Yes), the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is incremented by 1 and updated. Since this customer waiting effect process (S1305) is normally executed in a cycle of 1 ms, the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed can be determined by using the value of this counter value as a unit of ms. ing. It is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403). Here, in order to determine whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) to be described later is performed based on the card information command received from the main control device 110. Based on the data about the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e, if the balance is greater than 0, it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted. That is, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0.

  When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more ( S1404). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 5 seconds, the process of S1415 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether there is data set in the password storage area 223h (S1405). Here, in the password storage area 223h, when the password is set by the player in the password input process (FIG. 34, S1316) described later, the password is stored. That is, the fact that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h means that the return button 42 is invalidated by the password being set.

  When it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S1405: Yes), the display password for displaying the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) on the third symbol display device 81. Generate (set) an input command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (that is, the initial value 0 is stored in the password storage area 223m) (S1405: No), the customer waiting counter 223m It is determined whether the value is 30 seconds or more (S1407). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 30 seconds (S1407: No), for displaying the password setting screen (see FIG. 5 (a)) on the third symbol display device 81. A password setting command is generated (set) (S1408).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m is 30 seconds or more (S1407: Yes), the text "The return button is invalidated for crime prevention" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display lock notification command for generating is set (set) (S1409). A return button invalidation signal that invalidates the return button 42 (a state in which no signal is output from the return button 42 even if the return button 42 is operated) is generated (S1410). The return lock flag 223f indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated is set to ON (S1411).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more (S1412). When it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more, a normal display standby command for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is generated on the third symbol display device 81. (S1413). In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: No), the customer waiting counter 223m is reset (cleared) to an initial value of 0 and set ( S1414).

  In the process of S1415, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415: Yes), the subordinate return button flag i is set to ON (that is, the return button with the card inserted). It is determined whether 42 has been operated (S1416). When it is determined that the secondary return button flag 223i is on (S1416: Yes), it is possible to download the wallpaper for displaying the title screen on the standby screen of the mobile phone or the like on the third symbol display device 81. A display two-dimensional code setting command for displaying such a two-dimensional code is generated (set) (S1417). On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value greater than 30 seconds (S1415: No), or when it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1416: No), this The process ends.

  In this way, when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the special symbol remains unchanged for a predetermined time, a password input screen or a password setting screen is displayed. Therefore, the player can set the password or start inputting the password without any special operation by the player. Also, in the state where the return button 42 in which the password has already been set is disabled, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a shorter time than the password setting screen is displayed, the password input screen is displayed. With this configuration, when the player wants to activate the return button 42, he / she can start inputting the password without waiting for a long time.

  In addition, when the state in which the special symbol is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or more, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted, the return button 42 is pressed. Since it is set to be invalidated forcibly, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and the card is stolen. Also, when a card with a balance is not inserted, a normal title screen is displayed as a standby display. Therefore, when there is no player playing the game, a player visiting the PR of the gaming machine, etc. You can do it.

  Further, when the balance card is inserted, the return button 42 is operated within a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special symbol is stopped, and the card is returned, Since the two-dimensional code is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (the game privilege is given), when the player finishes the game, he / she operates the return button 42 within the time period to obtain the game privilege. You can get what you want to get. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the player forgets to return the card and goes home. In the present embodiment, the game privilege is configured to display a two-dimensional code. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information about pachinko machines 10 to be released in the future). Etc.) may be displayed, or some prize balls may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 26) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1501). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1503). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1507). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display holding count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). In the process of S1508, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1508 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1508 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1508 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1507, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1507: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1509). Then, when the prize information command is received (S1509: Yes), the result of winning / deciding judgment indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding area of the prize information storage area 223a (S1510). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired by the main controller 110, and each acquired counter is acquired. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each acquired value of each counter C1 to C3, the original lottery. Various types of information obtained when is performed are pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1509, when the winning information command is not received (S1509: No), it is then determined whether the card information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1511). When the card information command is received (S1511: Yes), the balance information of the card is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e based on the received card information command (S1512). On the other hand, when it is determined that the card information command has not been received (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1513). ), And returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This fluctuation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1312), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1615 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 28), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the process of S1606, it is determined whether or not the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606). When it is determined that the variation pattern command is out (S1606: No), the card return effect flag 223k is set to OFF (S1607). After that, the pending change process is executed (S1608). The details of the holding change process (S1608) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the card return button 42 is operated, the fluctuation starts. A process of changing the color and notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment is executed with respect to the pending which is sometimes hit. After the pending change process (S1608), the process of S1615 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606: Yes), is it a state in which a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300? It is determined (S1609). If it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card with the balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1610). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1610: Yes), the value of the lottery counter 223j is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is one of the winning values "0 to 4" (S1612).

  When it is determined that the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is out of range (S1612: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is a win (S1612: Yes), the return variation display mode is changed to the variation pattern set in S1604 on the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. The card return effect flag 223k that indicates is set to ON (S1613). The display variation pattern command set in S1604 is overwritten to generate (set) a display card return effect command.

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1615). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1615: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, and thus this variable display The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1615: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1616), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1617). Next, the stop type acquired in the process of S1617 is set as a display stop type command (S1618).

  Next, the pending change process (S1608) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pending change process (S1608). This hold change process (S1608) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the card with which the card reading unit 300 has a balance. When the return button 42 is operated when is inserted, if there is a big hit hold at the start of fluctuation, a process of displaying the result of the hit / miss judgment to the player by changing the hold display color is executed.

  In the hold change processing (S1608), first, it is determined whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, is the value stored in the slave card information storage area 223e greater than 0)? S1621). If it is determined that no card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: Yes), the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (that is, the special symbol is reserved). Is stored) is determined (S1622). When it is determined that the holding of the special symbol is 0 (S1622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding of the special symbol is stored (S1622: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1623). If it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1623: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is ON (S1623: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a winning hold among the pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1624).

  If it is determined that all the holdings are missed (S1624: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning hold is stored in the holding (S1624: Yes), it is displayed in the display color (red in the present embodiment) indicating to the player that the holding is a big hit. A hold change command to be generated is generated (S1625).

  In this way, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variation pattern that is a jackpot of the special symbol, the return variation display mode is replaced by the variation pattern set by the main control device 110 by lottery. Since it is determined, the player can be informed that the jackpot will be won early by displaying the return variation display mode. In addition, the return variation display mode is based on the fact that the player is informed during the change of the special symbol to operate the card return button 42 as shown in FIG. 4B, and the return button 42 is operated. Since the effect of notifying the player of a big hit early (confirmation notification) is executed, the player can operate the return button 42 early to return the card from the card reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card. Furthermore, since the return variable display mode is a variation pattern that is a big hit, it often takes a while until the ball lending operation is required thereafter, so while the ball lending operation is not performed for a long time, By forgetting that the card with the remaining balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300, it is possible to prevent forgetting to return the card.

  Further, even if the variation pattern is not a big hit, by operating the return button 42, it is configured to notify the result of the prefetch of the hold, which is a bonus in the game, so that the player can enjoy the return button. 42 can be operated, and the return button 42 can always be made aware. Therefore, the trouble of forgetting to return the card can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the timing of operating the return button 42 coincides with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, it is configured to notify the prefetching of the hold, so that the result of the prefetching of the hold is easily notified. However, it is configured so that the player can enjoy performing the operation in synchronization with the timing many times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead is performed based on the operation at any timing. The result may be notified. Further, the present invention is not limited to the result of prefetching, and may be configured to notify the determined variation pattern type (reach, super reach, etc.), or may be configured to display a specific character. However, it may be configured to give the player points in the game (a privilege such as increasing the displayed characters by accumulating the points).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a card effect control process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this card effect control processing (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled so that the card is forcibly ejected at the start of the jackpot. Alternatively, a process for determining whether the return button 42 has been operated with a card with a balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is executed.

  In the card effect control processing (S1313), first, it is determined whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether a balance greater than 0 is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e) (S1701). ). When it is determined that the card with the balance is not inserted (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card with the balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1701: Yes), whether the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot has been received from the main control device 110 (that is, the jackpot). It is determined whether the game is started (S1702). When it is determined that the opening command is received (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1703). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1703: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1703: No), the card ejection signal for causing the card reading unit 300 to return the card is set. As shown in FIG. 13, this card ejection signal is a signal that activates the signal directly on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction unit 42a, and is the same as when the return button 42 is operated. Let the state.

  The slave card information storage area 223e is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1705). The card output notification sound command for outputting the sound "The card will be returned. Please receive it." Is set on the sound output device 226. The display card ejection notification command for displaying the character "The card will be returned. Please remember to receive it !!" is set on the third pattern display device 81 (S1707).

  In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the card is forcibly returned in the state where the return button 42 is activated, so that the player does not have to operate the return button 42. , Cards can be collected. Therefore, the trouble of the player can be reduced. Also, because the opportunity to forcibly return it was the start of the jackpot game, the need for ball lending continued for a while and the player forgot to return the card and went home. It is possible to prevent the malfunction. In addition, since the card will be forcibly returned at the timing when the need for a ball lending will be lost for a while, immediately after the card is forcibly returned, the ball lending is required immediately, and the time and effort of having to insert the card again is required. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1702: No), it is determined whether the return button 42 has been operated (pressed) (S1708). When it is determined that the return button 42 has been operated (S1708: Yes), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to ON (S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 is not operated (S1708: No), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to OFF (S1710).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the card notification processing (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this card notification processing (S1314). This card notification processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300, The process of informing the three symbol display device 81 of the card information is executed. In addition, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when it is detected that the game is not being executed, it is confirmed that the card with a balance is still inserted in the card reading unit 300. The notification process is executed.

  In the card notification process (S1314), first, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0 (that is, there is a card balance) (S1801). When it is determined that there is no card balance (including the case where the card is not inserted) (S1801: No), the insertion notification lamp turn-off data for turning off the insertion notification lamp 40a is set (S1802).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a card balance (S1801: Yes), the insertion notification lamp 40a for notifying that the card provided in the front frame 14 is inserted into the card reading unit 300 is inserted. Information lamp lighting data is set (S1803). It is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is 3000 yen or more (S1804). When it is determined that the card balance is 3,000 yen or more (S1804: Yes), the voice notification command for outputting the voice "Card is inserted" from the voice output device 226 is set (S1805). A high-priced notification command for display is set to alternately display the characters "The card is in!" And "The card balance is ○○○ yen." (S1806). The amount of XX yen is displayed according to the card balance.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the card balance is less than 3000 yen (S1804: No), the characters "A card is in!" And "The card balance is ○○○ yen." Are displayed in white characters. A display small amount notification command for alternately displaying every 30 seconds is set (S1807). The amount of XX yen is displayed according to the card balance.

  By configuring in this way, while the card balance is high, it is possible to notify the player that the card is inserted by voice and conspicuous characters, so that the player can be made aware of it at all times. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting a certain card and suffering damage such as theft. Also, when the card balance is small, it is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous character color and is configured not to be informed by voice, so that the player is always informed by voice and conspicuous characters, It is possible to prevent problems that can not be concentrated on the game.

  In the present embodiment, the card balance is determined to be high when it is 3000 yen or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount may be set appropriately. Further, it may be provided on the amount setting button and the front frame 14 or the like so that the amount of money as a threshold value for changing the notification can be set by the player's operation. Further, the notification may be prohibited by the selection of the player. With such a configuration, the player can change the setting, and the game can be played in a state that suits the player's preference.

  Further, although the color of the notification character is white, the color of the notification is not limited thereto, and may be a semi-transparent character color. It may be configured to notify that a certain card is inserted.

  It is determined whether the handle sensor 510 is off (S1808). When it is determined that the handle sensor is off (S1808: Yes), the handle counter 223g is incremented by 1 and updated (S1809). It is determined whether the updated value of the handle counter 223g is the set value (15 seconds in this embodiment) or more (S1810). Here, since the handle counter 223g is updated every predetermined period when the handle sensor 510 is off, the handle counter 223g can be determined by converting the value of the handle counter 223g into time from the execution period. .

  When it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is less than the set value (S1810: No), the process of S1813 is executed. When it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than the set value (S1810: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the voice output device 226 to output a beep sound and "I forget to return the card!" The display notification command is set (S1811). On the other hand, when it is determined that the steering wheel sensor 510 is on (S1808), the value of the steering wheel counter 223g is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1812). Then, the process of S1813 is executed.

  As described above, when the handle sensor 510 remains off for a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) or more, if the card with the card balance is still inserted in the card reading unit 300, the player Since a character for notifying the player to return the card and a notification sound for calling the player's attention are output, it can be noticed even when the player forgets to return the card. Further, even if the user has already left his / her seat, he / she can be made aware that he / she has forgotten to return the card by hearing the alarm sound, and can be returned to the seat again. Also, even if the player returns home without noticing the notification sound, the clerk of the game store can recognize that the card has been forgotten by the notification sound, and the player manages it as a forgotten item at the game store. can do.

  In the processing of S1813, it is determined whether or not the human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14 is on (that is, there is no player in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813). If it is determined that the motion sensor 400 is on (S1814: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the sound output device 226 to output a beep sound and a display notification that "Forgetting to return the card!" The command is set (S1814). On the other hand, when it is determined that the human sensor 400 is off (that is, the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813: No), the process of S1815 is executed.

  In this way, the presence sensor 400 determines whether or not there is a player, determines that there is no player, and if a card with a balance is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the card is not loaded. Since the notification for prompting the return is given, the player can be made aware that he / she has forgotten the return as soon as he / she forgets the return and leaves the seat. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as the theft of the card.

  In the present embodiment, when the human sensor 400 is turned on, the notification regarding the card return is made immediately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the human sensor 400 is turned on. It may be configured to give a notification when the period (), etc. has elapsed. With this configuration, when the player tilts his body a little and the human sensor 400 is turned on for a short time, the notification can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being informed frequently and making the player feel uncomfortable.

  It is determined whether the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are on (S1815). When it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are turned on (S1815: Yes), a card notification sound that causes the sound output device 226 to output a beep sound and "I forget to return the card. The display notification command "!" Is set (S1816). On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a or the ball removal button sensor 52a is off (S1815: No), this process ends.

  When the upper plate sensor 17a is on, it means that there is no game ball in the upper plate 17, and when the ball removal button sensor is on, it means that the ball is discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it can be said that the player is in the state of finishing the game and returning, and in that case, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a notification prompting the return of the card is given. Therefore, the player can notice that the card is still inserted before returning home. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from returning home by forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as theft.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a card return effect process (S1315) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the card return effect process (S1315). The card return effect process (S1315) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the return display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, when the return button 42 is operated, the process of displaying the final notification effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the card return effect processing (S1315), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the balance information stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0). (S1901). When it is determined that the card with the balance is not inserted (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1902). When it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1902: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (S1902: Yes), whether the card return effect flag 223k is on (that is, the return variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81). It has been determined) (S1903). When it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is off (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is set on (S1904).

  When it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1904: No), the display mode of the special symbol for informing the third symbol display device 81 that it is a big hit (see the lower diagram of FIG. 4 (b)) Set the display confirmation notification command to be displayed with.

  Thus, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player operates the return button 42 according to the notification content displayed in the return variation display mode, A big hit is reported. Therefore, the player can always play the game while thinking that the variation of the special symbol is not started in the return variation display mode, and can be aware of operating the return button 42. In addition, since the jackpot is notified by operating the return button 42 based on the display of the return variation display mode, even if the card is returned, it is necessary to lend the ball for a while after that. The player has time to save and manage the cards. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of forgetting to return the card and suffering damage such as theft. Further, by operating the return button 42, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the function of the return button 42 can be increased in addition to returning the card.

  Next, the password input processing (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the password input process (S1316). This password input process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the password for setting the enable / disable of the return button 42 is input. Perform processing related to input and settings.

  In the password input process (S1316), first, it is determined whether the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the password setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2000). ). When it is determined that the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed (S2000: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated. When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S2001: Yes), it is determined whether a button other than the decision button 22a has been operated (S2003).

  When it is determined that any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S2004). When it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is raised by one. The upward direction command is set (S2005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S2006). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: Yes), the numeral designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is lowered by one for display. The down command is set (S2007). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the down button 22d is operated (S2006: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e is operated (S2008).

  When it is determined that the right direction button 22e has been operated (S2008: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right command for display to be set is set (S2009). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the right direction button 22e is operated (S2008: No), it is determined that the left direction button 22c is operated, and the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the cursor. A display leftward command for moving to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S2010).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the decision button 22a has been operated (S2003: No), password processing is executed (S2002). The password process (S2002) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 35. On the password setting screen or the password input screen, the password is set for the password set or input, and the return button 42 is clicked. The process of invalidating or collating the entered password with the set password and, if they match, validate the return button 42 is executed.

  Next, the password processing (S2002) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this password processing (S2002). This password processing (S2002) is executed in the password input processing (S1316 of FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a password for setting the activation and deactivation of the return button 42. Inputs and executes the processing related to setting.

  In the password processing (S2002), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the password storage area 223h) ( S2021). When it is determined that the displayed password setting screen is displayed (S2021: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S2022). Here, the normal password may include a number that is not actually present due to noise or the like (a number other than 1 to 5 in the present embodiment) or a password that has insufficient digits. To be

  When it is determined that the password is normal (S2022: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the password storage area 223h (S2023). A return button invalid signal is generated (S2024). The return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S2025). Here, the return button invalid signal is a signal that deactivates the photo MOS relay of the changeover switch 42b (the diode is turned off) in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is configured to be disconnected and switched to the connected state so that the return button 42 is set to be valid or invalid. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return button 42 may be mechanically fixed by a solenoid or the like so that it cannot be operated (pressed) from the back side. With this configuration, the return button 42 can be invalidated more easily.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password is abnormal (S2022: No), the display error command for displaying the character "Please input the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S2026).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h) (S2021: No), the entered password is the password. It is determined whether or not the passwords stored in the storage area 223h match (S2027). When it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the collation (S2027: Yes), the return button valid signal is set (set). Here, the return button valid signal sets the photo MOS relay, which is the changeover switch 42b, to active to turn on the diode of the photo MOS relay, and the signal line between the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is connected. It is a signal to set to the state of being. The password storage area 223h is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S2029). The return lock flag 223f is set to off (S2030). On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the password storage area 223h do not match (S2027: No), the characters "Password does not match" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The display mismatch error command to be displayed is set.

  In this way, the return button 42 is disabled by setting the password, and the return button 42 is enabled by entering the same password as the set password while the password is set. Since it is possible to cancel (deactivate), if you deactivate the return button 42, even if you forget to operate the return button 42 and leave your seat, the card will be returned to another person. Can be prevented from being stolen. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in a state where the card with the balance is inserted with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a break process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this rest processing (S1317). This break processing (S1317) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the player operates the break button 500 arranged on the front frame 14. Thus, the process for setting the invalidation of the return button 42 is executed.

  In the break processing (S1317), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101). When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether the break button 500 has been operated (pressed) (S2102). When it is determined that the break button 42 has been operated (S2102: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103). When it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: Yes), the display password input command for displaying the password input screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: No), the display password setting command for displaying the password setting screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S2105). On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S2101: No), or if the break button 500 is not operated (S2102: No), this process ends.

  In this way, when the password is set and the return button 42 is not invalidated by operating the break button 500, the process of displaying the password setting screen is executed in the process of the customer waiting effect process (S1305). The password screen can be displayed, the password can be set, and the return button 42 can be invalidated without waiting until the prompt.

  Further, when the password is set by operating the break button 500, the password input screen is displayed. Therefore, when the return button 42 is hurriedly activated and is desired to be activated, the break button 500 is displayed. By operating, the password input screen can be displayed immediately and the return button 42 can be activated. Therefore, the player can do without waiting for the input of the password, and the time can be effectively used.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the password setting screen is displayed by operating the break button 500, but by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is forcibly invalidated, and the pachinko machine is operated. It is also possible to provide a release switch or the like on the back side of the machine 10 for enabling the setting in which the return button 42 is disabled by the break button 500. In this way, by operating the break button 500, the player can immediately take a break, which improves convenience. Further, when the break button is finished and the return button 42 is desired to be released, the setting can be released by calling the clerk of the game shop, and the security can be improved.

  In addition, by pressing the break button 500, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, the shooting of the game ball may be set to be prohibited, and the fact that the player is taking a break is displayed by the third symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on the device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress damage caused by illegally playing a game by another player during a break or when the ball lending button 43 is operated and the game ball is stolen.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described in which the return button 42 is set with a password to switch between invalidation and activation.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, by disposing the shutter member 710 capable of covering the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43, and setting a password, the shutter member is set. Locking and unlocking of 710 is performed.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the shutter member 710 is arranged and the locking and unlocking is performed by a password.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a shutter button 700 and a shutter member 710 are added to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The shutter button 700, which will be described later in detail, is an operation button for displaying an input or setting screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  The shutter member 710 is made of a thin metal plate, and slides to the left and right to close the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 on the front side and to open the front frame 14 in an open position. It is configured to be movable. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the shutter member 710 and the movable portion of the shutter member 710. 38A is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the closed position, and FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the open position. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), on the front side of the shutter member 710 (the front side of the gaming machine), an operation knob 710a is formed so as to project to the front side so that the player can slide the shutter member 710. ing. Although not shown, the front frame 14 is formed with a rail portion that slidably holds the shutter member 710, and is held by inserting the shutter member 710 into the rail portion. Is configured.

  As a configuration for fixing (locking) the shutter member 710 in the closed position, a lock motor 900 and an L-shaped locking restricting member 900a that rotates in accordance with the rotation of the lock motor 900 are provided. The lock motor 900 rotates 90 degrees in the forward and reverse directions to bring the L-shaped piece of the locking restricting member 900a into contact with one side of the shutter member 710 on the open position side to move from the closed position to the open position. It is moved to a position where the shutter member 710 is restricted and a position where the locking member 900a for locking does not come into contact with the shutter member 710 even if the shutter member 710 slides and is retracted downward.

  A lock sensor 910 for detecting the position of the locking restricting member 900a is provided. The lock sensor 910 is composed of a reflection type optical sensor, and is configured to detect the locking restricting member 900a by reflected light. As shown in FIG. 38A, the lock sensor 910 is arranged at a position where the lock restricting member 900a does not detect the lock restricting member 900a at the position where the lock restricting member 900a restricts the slide of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), at the position where the locking restricting member 900 a is retracted to the position where the sliding of the shutter member 710 is not restricted, the locking restricting member 710 is located at a position where it is detected. That is, when the lock sensor 910 does not detect the locking restricting member 900a (the lock sensor 910 is off), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is fixed, and the lock sensor 910 locks the locking restricting member 710. Is detected (the lock sensor 910 is on), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is unlocked (sliding state).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is fixed or released by the structure as shown in FIG. 38, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the restricting member or the like may be projected and fixed by a solenoid or the like. Alternatively, the sliding operation of the shutter member 710 may be restricted by a strong electromagnet or the like.

  The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the shutter button 700 and the lock motor 900 connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is added.

  The shutter button 700 is composed of a push-down switch, and is arranged on the right side of the ball lending button 43 of the front frame 14 so as to project to the front side. When the shutter button 700 is pressed, an electric signal is output to the input / output port 113 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The lock motor 900 is composed of a stepping motor for rotating the locking restricting member 900 a, and the rotation is controlled based on a signal from the voice lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is composed of a reflective optical sensor for detecting the locking restricting member 900a.

  A shutter password storage area 223p is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The shutter password storage area 223p stores the password input in the shutter process (S1370 of FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 113 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later (see S1373 of FIG. 43). When the shutter member 710 is fixed (when the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p), whether the input password matches the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p. The data in the shutter password storage area 223p is used when the verification is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 40, a main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1300). The main processing (FIG. 40, S1300) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 26, S1300) of the first embodiment in shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350). ) And have been added. Details of the shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and the shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350) will be described later. Each process of S1301 to S1322 in the second embodiment is the same as each process of S1301 to S1322 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1316 is completed, the shutter input process (FIG. 40, S1300) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 41, a shutter input process (S1340) that is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this shutter input processing (S1340). The shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340) is a process for executing a process for displaying an input screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  In the shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340), first, it is determined whether the shutter 700 has been operated (pressed) (S1341). When it is determined that the shutter button 700 has been operated (S1341: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342). When it is determined that the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: Yes), the display shutter input command is generated (set). This display shutter input command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. 5B.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: No), the display shutter setting command is generated (set) (S1344). This display shutter setting command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has not been operated (S1341: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the player operates the shutter button 700, either the screen for entering the password or the screen for setting the password is automatically set according to the state of the shutter member 710 at that time. Therefore, the player can easily play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a shutter setting process (S1350) which is one process of the main process (S1300 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this shutter setting processing (S1350). The shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) is performed by moving the cursor or the like on the password input screen or the setting screen based on the operation of the frame button 22, and based on the setting or input of the password, the shutter member 710. Is a process for executing locking or unlocking of the.

  In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), first, is the shutter password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the shutter password setting screen (FIG. 5A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81? It is determined (S1351). When it is determined that the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether a button other than the decision button 22a has been operated (S1353).

  When it is determined that any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: Yes), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S1354). If it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed one above. A display upward command for raising is set (S1355).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the up button 22b is operated (S1354: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d is operated (S1356). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: Yes), the numeral designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is lowered by one. The display down command is set (S1357). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S1358).

  When it is determined that the right direction button 22e has been operated (S1358: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right display command to be displayed is set (S1359). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button other than the right direction button 22e is operated (S1358: No), it is determined that the left direction button 22c is operated, and the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed. A display leftward command for moving the cursor to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S1360).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the decision button 22a has been operated (S1353: No), the shutter process is executed (S1370). The details of the shutter processing (S1370) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. However, on the shutter password setting screen or the shutter password input screen, a password is set for the password set or input, and the shutter member is set. A process of locking (fixing) 710 in the closed position, collating the entered password with the set password, and if they match, unlocking the shutter member 710 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a shutter process (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this shutter processing (S1370). This shutter process (S1370) is executed in the shutter setting process (S1350 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for locking or unlocking the shutter member 710. To do.

  In the shutter process (S1370), first, it is determined whether the displayed screen is a shutter password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether a password is not set in the shutter password storage area 223p). (S1371). When it is determined that the displayed screen is the shutter password setting screen (S1371: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S1372). Here, the normal password may include a number that is not actually present due to noise or the like (a number other than 1 to 5 in the present embodiment) or a password that has insufficient digits. To be

  When it is determined that the password is normal (S1372: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1373). A signal for operating the lock motor 900 to the closed position (in the present embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the open position) is set (S1374).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password is abnormal (S1372: No), the display error command for displaying the character "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1375).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shutter password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p) (S1371: No), the password input this time is displayed. Determines whether the passwords stored in the shutter password storage area 223p match (S1376). When it is determined that the passwords match each other as a result of the collation (S1376: Yes), a signal for moving the lock restricting member 900a to the unlock position where the lock motor 900 unlocks the shutter member 710 is set (this). In the embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the lock position) (S1377). The shutter password storage area 223p is reset to the initial value (0 in this embodiment) (S1378).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p do not match (S1376: No), the text "Password does not match" appears on the third pattern display device 81. The display mismatch error command for displaying is set (S1379).

  By setting the password in this way, the shutter member 710 can be locked at the closed position. Therefore, the player can lock the shutter member 710 by prohibiting the sliding of the shutter member 710 by setting the password on the shutter password setting screen after sliding the shutter member 710 to the closed position. On the other hand, by operating the shutter button 700 while the shutter member 710 is locked, the shutter password input screen is displayed, and the same password set on the shutter password setting screen is input, The shutter member 710 can be unlocked. Therefore, the shutter member 710 can be locked or unlocked by an easy operation. In addition, the password is reset once it is unlocked, so even if the player changes, the password set by the previous player does not remain and you can use the password without confusion. Lock or unlock operation can be performed.

  In this embodiment, once the shutter member 710 is locked by the password, the lock is maintained until the set password is input or the initialization process of the RAM 223 is executed. Not limited to that, the lock may be automatically released after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 are locked. You may comprise so that it may notify. With such a configuration, even if the shutter member 710 is left in a locked state inadvertently, the shutter member 710 is automatically released or notified when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed. By doing so, the normal state can be restored by the initial processing of the RAM 223 by the clerk of the game shop.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be slid by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shutter member 710 can be automatically moved to the closed position by setting a password or pressing the shutter button. You may comprise. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the user forgets to slide the shutter member 710 to the closed position and tries to set a password. Further, by operating the shutter button 700, the shutter member 710 may be automatically locked without requiring a password or the like. In such a case, the lock may be released by calling a clerk of the game shop or performing the lock release by fingerprint authentication or the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, both the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 are covered with the shutter member 710, but it is also possible to cover only one of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43. Good. Further, the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 may be provided with dedicated shutters so that they can be individually locked.

  In this embodiment, the password is used to lock the shutter member 710, but the invention is not limited to this, and fingerprint authentication or voice recognition may be used, or the pachinko machine 10 side forcibly issues a password or a two-dimensional code. Then, the player may take a memo or take a picture with a mobile phone or the like to manage it, or the pachinko machine 10 may issue a dedicated IC card or the like. With such a configuration, the player can easily lock the return button 42 or the ball lending button 43 without the problem that the player forgets the password.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 extracts the signals for lighting the respective segments of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, so that the balance information of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is extracted. It is configured to determine On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the light amount of each of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance display 41 is detected, and the balance displayed on the balance display 41 based on the detected light amount. The difference is that the configuration is to detect information. The other configurations are the same.

  As a configuration for detecting the light amount of each LED of the balance indicator 41, a light detection sensor capable of detecting an extremely small amount of light is arranged for each LED on the balance display surface of the balance indicator 41. Further, not only that, but a wall portion that stands up partially or entirely around the balance display surface on which the balance of the balance indicator 41 is displayed is provided, and a light detection sensor capable of detecting the amount of light is provided on the wall portion. You may arrange | position toward each LED. Further, the substrate on which each LED is arranged may be formed of a transparent substrate, and a light detection sensor for detecting the light amount of each LED may be provided on the back side of the substrate.

  Further, the light detection sensor is configured to be provided for each LED, but the invention is not limited thereto, and thus it may be configured to be provided for each LED segment. With this configuration, it is possible to more accurately detect the balance display that is lit and displayed on the balance display 41. Further, the light detection sensor may be arranged so as to detect the total amount of light with which the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c are turned on. With this configuration, the number of light detection sensors can be reduced, and the number of wiring lines and the like can be reduced.

  The main controller 110 receives the light amount detected by the light detection sensor as a light amount signal via the payout controller 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the display information data corresponding to the light amount indicated by the light amount signal, based on the received light amount signal. In this determination method, a display information correspondence table in which display information is stored in association with each combination of light amounts detected by each light detection sensor is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the table is set. The display information corresponding to the light amount is selected from the display information correspondence table to determine the card balance.

  With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can identify the display information displayed on the balance display device 41 without electrically connecting the balance display device 41 and the main control device 110. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being transmitted from the card reading unit 300 to the main control device 110. It is also possible to prevent an illegal signal from being sent from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, the light detection sensor for detecting the amount of light is used, but the balance information may be acquired by using an image pickup unit or the like for recognizing the balance display displayed on the balance display 41. You may comprise. In such a case, in order not to hinder the player from visually recognizing the display of the balance indicator 41, the display is tilted diagonally to a position where it does not overlap with the LEDs on the opposite side of the substrate on which the LEDs are arranged. A mirror may be provided and the balance display projected on the mirror may be imaged (captured) from each LED substrate side. Further, each LED of the balance indicator 41 may be arranged on a transparent substrate, and the balance display may be imaged (captured) from the back side of each LED substrate.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined and the balance is notified by the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, an investment amount storage area for storing the reduction amount of the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 as the total investment amount is provided, This is different from the first embodiment in that the game history information and the like are given to the player based on the value of the investment amount storage area. The other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  First, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. On the standby screen, when the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 of the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, a menu screen is displayed, and a screen for inputting a password for managing game history information can be selected. This password is issued based on the player's information stored in the server by the player's information being stored in the server when the player registers as a member on a specific homepage using a mobile phone or the like. Password.

  Information stored in the server includes the number of jackpots, a specific reach, a specific game state (such as the number of consecutive positive changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the total amount of investment, and payment. The total of the game balls issued, the balance based on the amount of investment and the game balls paid out, the total points awarded in the game, and the like are stored.

  Depending on the information stored in the server, the privilege obtained on the home page accessed by the player may change, or the password may be entered into the gaming machine, resulting in an unusual mode (voice, music, type of displayed character, etc.). ) Changes. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is reached, the wallpaper displayed on the standby screen of the mobile phone, the ringtone of the mobile phone, etc., which could not be obtained until now, can be downloaded, or the Characters, images, music, etc. displayed on the symbol display device 81 will be played in a manner different from usual.

  When the password issued on the member-only screen of the homepage is input to the pachinko machine 10, various information stored in the server can be discriminated by the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a corresponding password is preset for the information stored in the server, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 reads the corresponding data from the ROM 223 when the password is input. Is set. Then, when the game is played, various information in the game (the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (the number of consecutive probable changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are read by the password. The stored data is added or updated and stored.

  When the player finishes the game, by operating the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 to display the menu screen and select issuance of the two-dimensional code, various information updated in the game this time ( A process for generating a two-dimensional code is executed based on the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (such as the number of consecutive probable changes and the number of times the premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), and the third process is performed. The generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the symbol display device 81. The player takes in the two-dimensional code by using the camera function of the mobile phone and accesses the member-only page of the home page indicated by the two-dimensional code. As a result, various information newly updated in the game played this time is stored in the server.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to identify the total investment amount of the player and the balance and the like so far, the variation pattern of the special symbol selected is changed based on the investment amount and the balance and the like. To be done. Specifically, for a player with a large investment amount, when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is a big hit, in a normal time (when the investment amount is small), a premium with a low probability of being selected The reach selection probability is set high. As a result, for players with a large amount of investment, that is, for players with a long playing time, it is easy to select premium reach, and all types of fluctuation patterns of special symbols set on the pachinko machine 10 can be seen. It is configured so that it can be easily performed.

  Further, in the case of a big hit, by displaying the income and expenditure information on the third symbol display device 81, the income and expenditure so far can be confirmed, and the income and expenditure is positive if the probability variation state continues for a number of times in succession. You can see if Therefore, the player can play a game with a goal, and when he / she achieves the goal, he can enjoy the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in order to detect the firing of the game ball, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 measures the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. In the present embodiment, 100 game balls are shot per minute, so the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the number of shots based on the measured time. It should be noted that, in order not to include in the measurement time, the case where the handle sensor 510 is turned on even though the game ball has not been fired, the handle sensor 510 is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Second), when the game ball does not pass through the second ball entrance 67, the measurement can be stopped to calculate a more accurate number of shots. In this case, when the game ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the measurement may be restarted.

  In this way, by detecting the launch of the game ball, whether you are playing with the game ball by lending a ball, or whether you are not lending the ball and playing with the ball you got with a jackpot etc. It can be determined by the change in the forehead over time. When it is determined that the player is playing a game with a ball, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is operated so as to perform a card return operation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the card return 42 and returning home with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by the theft of the card and the misuse of the card information (the operation of lending the ball without permission).

  Also, if you are playing with this ball, the state of the game so far (state after the big hit or the difference between the game ball paid out so far (on that day) and the game ball launched ) Determines whether it is possible to play a game with a holding ball, and it is not possible to play a game with a holding ball (that is, when it is not after a big hit, or when the number of differential balls fired is more) State), the game shop side can confirm the state of the pachinko machine 10 by outputting an error command to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal (not shown). Therefore, even if a game ball is illegally brought from outside the store and played, the illegality can be found early. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the game shop.

  In the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball is fired is determined by measuring the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game ball 13 is fired by the ball firing unit 112a. It may be configured to count by providing a sensor for detecting the game balls, or may be configured to detect and count the number of game balls supplied to the ball launch unit 112a.

  The configurations of the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment may be combined appropriately.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

  External signal receiving means that is provided outside the gaming machine and receives an external signal that is output based on the reading of valuable value information stored in the storage medium by an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium In a gaming machine having an external control means that is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means, a signal for extracting an external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means. Based on the extraction means and the external signal extracted by the signal extraction means, the storage medium determination means for determining whether the external device has read the storage medium, and the control means for executing the main control of the game are the storage medium. A notification means for notifying the player of the information about the storage medium to the player based on the notification signal output by the judgment result of the judgment means. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, an external signal which is provided outside the gaming machine and which is output based on the reading of the valuable value information stored in the storage medium by the external device which requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium Is received by the external signal receiving means. The external control means is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means. The external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external signal extracted by the signal extracting unit, the storage medium determining unit determines whether the external device has read the storage medium. Based on the notification signal output by the control means for executing the main control of the game based on the determination result of the storage medium determination means, the information about the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. Thereby, the player can determine whether or not there is a storage medium read by the external device, based on the information about the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player forgets to read the storage medium into the external device. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage caused when the player returns home with the storage medium being read and is stolen with respect to the storage medium or the valuable value information stored in the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1, a display mode based on valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device has a valuable display means for which display control is performed by the external device, and the signal extracting means has the valuable display. An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the external device, wherein the storage medium determining device is configured to extract the external display control signal based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extracting device. Is for discriminating the valuable value information of the storage medium read, and the notifying means provides the player with information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the discrimination result of the storage medium discriminating means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by notifying a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode based on the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is display-controlled by the valuable device by the external device. An external display control signal output from an external device for controlling the display of the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extracting means, the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is discriminated by the storage medium discriminating means. Based on the determination result, the player is notified of the information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium by the notification means. As a result, the valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means can be discriminated and a notification can be given based on the valuable value information. Therefore, more accurate information about the storage medium read in the external device can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player forgets to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the valuable display means is configured to display predetermined information by displaying a plurality of light emitting segments in combination, and the external display control signal is Each of the plurality of light emitting segments is output respectively, and the signal extracting means extracts the display control signals output corresponding to the respective light emitting segments as external display control signals. The storage medium discriminating means discriminates valuable value information of the storage medium by combining the respective extracted external display control signals.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, predetermined information is displayed on the valuable display means by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments. A display control signal is output for each of the plurality of light emitting segments. The display control signal corresponding to each light emitting segment is extracted by the signal extraction means as an external display control signal. By combining the extracted respective external display control signals, the valuable information of the storage medium is discriminated by the storage medium discriminating means. Thereby, the display content displayed by the valuable display means can be accurately determined. Therefore, the player can be notified of more accurate information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read in the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extracting means outputs a signal by receiving a light emitting element that emits light when the external signal is input and a light receiving element that receives the light emitted from the light emitting element. And a gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising at least:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. At least the signal extraction unit is configured by a light emitting element that emits light when an external signal is input and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. As a result, since the light emitting element cannot be emitted from the gaming machine side, it is possible to suppress fraudulent output from the gaming machine side to the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent output of the lending signal to the external device. Therefore, damage due to fraud can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extracting means is at least a magnetic field detecting means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when the external signal is output. Characteristic game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. At least the signal extracting unit is configured by a magnetic field detecting unit that detects a magnetic field that changes when an external signal is output. As a result, since it is not possible to directly output a signal from the gaming machine side to the external device, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being output to the external device.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and receives a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. In a gaming machine for paying out a game medium, an operating unit having an operation unit operable by the player, and a storage medium read by the external device is returned to the player based on the operation of the operating unit. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal for executing the return processing or the release processing for canceling the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium to the external device, and the operation part of the operation means is not operated. In this case, the forced return control means for outputting a return signal to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger is also included. Game machine B1 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out based on the lending request signal. Based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation means is not operated, the return signal is output by the forced return control means to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. Thereby, the storage medium read by the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be released to the external device under the control of the gaming machine side. Therefore, the player forgets the operation of performing the storage medium return processing or the valuable value information releasing processing, and thus damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, a win / loss determination means for executing a win / loss determination of a game based on the satisfaction of a win / loss determination condition, and a display control means for displaying on the display means identification information capable of identifying the win / loss determination result of the win / loss determination means. If the display means displays identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player, and the forced return control means, A gaming machine B2, wherein the return signal is output to the operation signal output means on the basis of the hit determination result of the hit determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays on the display means identification information capable of identifying the result of the judgment. When the display unit displays the identification information indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit, the privilege game executing unit executes the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player. Then, the return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss determination means. As a result, it is possible to return the storage medium read in the external device or cancel reading the valuable value information based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player does not have to be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the external device has read the valuable value information of the storage medium, and forgetting the return process or the cancellation process. Therefore, the damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the win / win determination condition is satisfied, the win / win determination condition that is satisfied is stored until a start condition is displayed that displays identification information for win / loss determination corresponding to the win / win determination condition. The forced return determination means for determining whether or not the determination result corresponding to the determination condition stored in the determination determination storage means is determined before the start condition is satisfied. The game machine B3, wherein the control means causes the operation signal output means to output the return signal based on the determination that the advance hit determination means is a hit.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. To be done. The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the fact that the advance hit determination means determines that the hit is successful. As a result, the return process or the cancellation process is executed by the external device before the identification information indicating the win / loss judgment result is displayed on the display unit, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the win / loss judgment result in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the cancellation process will not be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device is reading the storage medium.

  Valuable display means for displaying and controlling information based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine by the external device, and a predetermined value corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a predetermined game medium to a player based on receiving a lending request signal for requesting the game machine to lend the game medium, the valuable display means is operated from the external device to the valuable display means. A signal extracting means for extracting the output display control signal, a valuable discriminating means for discriminating valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on the signal extracted by the signal extracting means, and the valuable discriminating means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising: a notifying unit for notifying the discriminating information regarding the valuable value information discriminated by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device provided outside the gaming machine is displayed on the valuable display means by the external device. The predetermined game medium is paid out to the player by the payout means based on the reception of the lending request signal requesting the game machine to lend the predetermined game medium corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device. The display control signal output from the external device to the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the extracted signal, the valuable discriminating means discriminates the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device. Discrimination information regarding the discriminated valuable value information is reported by the report notification means. Thus, by extracting the signal for displaying the valuable display means, it is possible to determine the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, the player can be notified of the detailed value information by notifying the determination information regarding the determined value information by the notifying means. Therefore, by forgetting to let the player recognize that the valuable information of the storage medium is being read by the external device, he forgets to execute the return processing of the storage medium and the cancel processing of the valuable information. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering damage such as the storage medium being stolen or the valuable information being misused.

  In the gaming machine C1, the valuable display means displays the balance information corresponding to the valuable value information stored in the storage medium as information based on the valuable value information, and pays out the predetermined gaming medium. Is executed, the remaining balance information corresponding to the updated valuable value information is consumed and updated, and the notification means is displayed on the valuable display means. A remaining gaming balance information is notified as the discrimination information, and the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, as the information based on the valuable value information, the remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is displayed, and every time the predetermined game medium is paid out, the valuable value corresponding to it is displayed. The remaining balance information corresponding to the consumed and updated valuable value information is updated and displayed on the valuable display means. The remaining balance information displayed on the valuable display means is notified by the notification means as discrimination information. Thus, by notifying the player of the remaining balance of the storage medium, it is possible to recognize that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously determining that there is no remaining balance even though the storage medium has a remaining balance and stopping the game without executing the return process or the cancellation process. is there.

  In the gaming machine C2, the notification means has a display means capable of displaying a display mode based on the remaining balance information, and the valuable determination means determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a preset set value. In this case, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in the normal display mode, while if it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than a preset setting value, the normal mode is displayed. A gaming machine C3, wherein a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the display mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the notification means, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed by the display means. Further, when the valuable discriminating unit determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than the preset set value, the display unit displays the display mode based on the remaining balance information in the normal display mode. When it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than the preset set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the normal display mode. As a result, when the remaining balance is larger than the set value, it is displayed in a display mode different from that in the normal time, so that the player can strongly recognize that the remaining balance is large. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the return processing and the cancellation processing with a large amount of the remaining balance, and causing a great loss to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a win / loss determination means for performing a win / loss determination based on the satisfaction of a win / loss determination condition, and an identification information for notifying the player of the win / loss determination result of the win / loss determination means And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the display control means displays the display control means and the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit. When the privilege game execution means determines that the privilege game is to be executed, the informing means stores the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the privilege game. Notify the player to perform an operation to perform a return process to return or a release process to release the valuable information of the read storage medium. Gaming machine C4, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. On the basis of the satisfaction of the hit / miss judgment condition, the hit / miss judgment is executed by the hit / miss judgment means. Identification information for notifying the player of the result of the judgment is displayed on the display means by the display control means. When the display control means displays on the display means identification information indicating that the hit / miss determination result is a hit, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game execution means determines that the privilege game is to be executed, the return process of returning the storage medium of the external device or the reading of the read storage medium is performed based on the start of the privilege game. The informing means informs the return informing mode informing that the player is to perform the operation of executing the releasing process of releasing the valuable information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player to execute the return process or the cancellation process based on the start of the privilege game, so that while the player is executing the privilege game, the external device is notified. It is possible to prevent a problem of forgetting that the valuable information of the storage medium is being read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the storage medium from being stolen and the valuable information from being misused.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, A gaming machine having an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and a state in which the external device is reading valuable value information of a storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. The external device based on the operation of operating the operating device having an operating unit operable by the player and the external determining device for determining whether or not the operating device is operated. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device to return the storage medium to the player or return processing for releasing the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium, On the condition that the operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated and the external determining means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the game is played. An informing means for informing a person of an operation informing mode for informing the person to operate the operating means, and when the operating informing mode is informed by the informing means, the operation determining means operates the operating means. Based on the determination, the notification means includes notification switching means for switching to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. Game machine D1 which is characterized in.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and lends the gaming medium output to the gaming machine based on the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. In addition, a return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of an operation unit having an operation unit operable by the player, or reading of valuable value information of the storage medium. The operation signal output means outputs a return signal for executing a releasing process for releasing the. Further, the operation determining means determines whether or not the operating means has been operated. On the condition that the external discriminating means discriminates that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the notifying means informs the player to operate the operating means. To be done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification means, the notification switching means is switched to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode by the notification determination means based on the determination that the operation means is operated. Can be switched by. As a result, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the cancellation process according to the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information.

  The gaming machine D1 has a return signal extracting means for extracting a return signal output based on the operation of the operating portion, and the operation determining means has the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extracting means. A game machine D2 for determining whether or not the operation means is operated by a player based on the above.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extraction return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player. Thereby, it is possible to accurately recognize whether the player has operated the operation means. Therefore, the player can be notified in a specific notification mode based on the timing at which the operation means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the player has operated the operation means, and it is possible to confirm without forgetting the processing of the external device.

  The gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2 has valuable display means for displaying balance information indicated by valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on an external control signal received by the receiving means, The external discriminating means is configured to discriminate the balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extracting means, and the operation discriminating means causes the external discriminating means to pass the balance information through a predetermined minimum balance. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it is determined that the operating means has been operated when it is determined that the operating means has been lost.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or the game machine D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. The balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means based on the extracted external signal. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has passed without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. Thus, it is possible to determine that the player has operated the operating means without detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the notification of the hit determination means for executing the hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition and the identification information capable of distinguishing the hit determination result of the hit determination means. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, which is one of the means, and a dynamic display manner for deciding the dynamic display manner of the identification information displayed by the display control means on the win / fail judgment means based on the win / no judgment result. Means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information indicating a hit is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display mode determining means Yes, based on the fact that the external discriminating means discriminates that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the player operates the operating means. It is for determining a return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode to be notified, and the notification switching means, when the operation notification mode is displayed, the operation determination means performs the operation. A gaming machine D4, which switches to a display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the hit based on the determination that the means has been operated.

  According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays the identification information capable of identifying the result of the hit determination on the display means which is one of the notification means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic determination mode determination unit by the dynamic determination mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The operation of notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the result of the hit / damage determination being a hit and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. The return dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode including the notification mode, is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching means switches the display mode to notify the identification information indicating the hit based on the determination that the operation determination means has operated the operation means. As a result, since the identification information indicating the hit is displayed by operating the operation means in the dynamic display mode of the identification information, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of operating the operation means. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that the return dynamic display mode will be determined, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the operation means. Therefore, the damage caused by the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the notification of the hit determination means for executing the hit determination of the game based on the satisfaction of the hit determination condition and the identification information capable of distinguishing the hit determination result of the hit determination means. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, which is one of the means, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means; When a condition is met, a win / loss judgment storage means for storing the hit / miss judgment condition that has been satisfied until the start condition that displays identification information for the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met A prior win determination means for determining the win determination result corresponding to the win determination condition stored in the determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the notification means includes: When it is determined that the external device is in a state where the external device is reading valuable value information of the storage medium, when the operation determination device determines that the operation device has been operated, the advance acceptance determination A gaming machine D5 characterized by notifying the player of the determination result of the means.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. Identification information capable of identifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the hit is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. . The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means. Thus, by operating the operation means, it is possible to give a bonus to the player and increase the chances that the player operates the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player forgetting to operate the operation means and suffering from the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information A payout means for paying out the game medium, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A gaming machine having: an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal; and, based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, the external device reads valuable value information of a storage medium. The external determination means for determining whether or not it is in a state, the operation means having an operation unit operable by the player, and the operation of the operation means based on the operation An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device to return the storage medium read by the device to the player, or to perform a release process to release the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium. A valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means And a switching control means for switching when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium to output corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for playing. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is set in a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. When the condition is established, the switching is performed by the switching control means. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return processing or the cancellation processing by switching to the prohibition state in which the return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the damage of the theft is encountered. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  The gaming machine E1 has an input means capable of inputting an identification symbol based on the operation of the player, and an identification information storage means for storing the identification information input by the input means, and the switching control means. Indicates that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition is determined to be a state in which the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Based on the stored information, while switching from the valid state to the prohibited state, in the prohibited state, the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit. Based on the above, the gaming machine E2 is configured to switch from the prohibited state to the valid state.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external device determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the switching control unit switches from the prohibited state to the valid state based on that the input unit inputs the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. With this, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage due to the theft of the storage medium by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a clocking means for measuring the switching execution time, and the clocking means having a preset value or more. A gaming machine E3 characterized by having a forced releasing means for forcibly switching to a valid state when it becomes.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the switching execution time is measured by the time counting means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the timekeeping means exceeds a predetermined set value, it is forcibly switched to the valid state by the forcible cancellation means. As a result, the prohibited state can be automatically canceled at the preset time. Therefore, even if it is illegally set to the prohibited state, it can be automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is set based on a predetermined trigger. A gaming machine E4 having a notifying means for notifying.

  The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is notified by the notification unit based on a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to easily determine that the prohibition state has been switched to the prohibition state. Therefore, in the case where the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left as it is, the gaming shop side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information A payout means for paying out the game medium, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A gaming machine having: an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal; and, based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, the external device reads valuable value information of a storage medium. An external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player is in a state, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means for allowing the external device to detect the value When it is determined that the player is not being read by the player detection means and the player is not reading the valuable information of the storage medium by the external device. A gaming machine F1 having: a notifying means for notifying a notification mode indicating that there is.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium to output corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for playing. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is set in a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. When the condition is established, the switching is performed by the switching control means. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return processing or the cancellation processing by switching to the prohibition state in which the return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the damage of the theft is encountered. Can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, and an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, A gaming machine having an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and a state in which the external device is reading valuable value information of a storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. An external determination means for determining whether the game is being played, a game execution determination means for determining a period during which a game is being played by a player, and a predetermined period by the game execution determination means When it is determined that the game is not being played, it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F2, further comprising: a notifying unit for notifying a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external device determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the switching control unit switches from the prohibited state to the valid state based on that the input unit inputs the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. With this, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage due to the theft of the storage medium by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium A payout means for paying out, a storage means capable of storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and a discharge means for discharging the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the game machine by the operation of the player And a external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A storage discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are stored in the storing means, a discharge operation discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are discharged by the discharging means, and the external control External signal extracting means for extracting a signal, and external determining means for determining whether the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. When the discharge operation determination means determines that the discharge operation has been executed, and the storage determination means determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination means causes the external device to store the valuable value of the storage medium. When it is determined that the information is being read, the player has a notifying means for giving a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F3, the switching execution time is measured by the clocking means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the timekeeping means exceeds a predetermined set value, it is forcibly switched to the valid state by the forcible cancellation means. As a result, the prohibited state can be automatically canceled at the preset time. Therefore, even if it is illegally set to the prohibited state, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

In the gaming machine F1 to the gaming machine F3, an operation unit having an operation unit operable by the player,
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operation means. An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which output of the return signal by the operation signal output means is prohibited based on the establishment of a setting condition. And a gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibited state is set is notified by the notification unit based on a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to easily determine that the prohibition state has been switched to the prohibition state. Therefore, in the case where the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left as it is, the gaming shop side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out, and a valuable display means for displaying and controlling information based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device, the valuable display means is displayed on the valuable display means. Image information detecting means for detecting the image information, the information discriminating means for discriminating the valuable value information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means from the image information detected by the image information detecting means, and the information discriminating means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a notifying means for notifying a player of a notification mode regarding the valuable value information determined by.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. According to the lending request signal, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. Information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is displayed on the valuable display means whose display is controlled by the external device. The image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detecting means. The valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means is discriminated by the information discriminating means from the image information detected by the image information detecting means. The informing means informs the player of the informed form regarding the determined valuable value information. As a result, not only the valuable display means, but also the notification mode can be used to confirm the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Therefore, damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means is for detecting the light quantity of the image information displayed on the valuable display means, and the information discriminating means is based on the light quantity detected by the image information detecting means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by determining valuable value information corresponding to the amount of light.

  The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the light amount of the image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detecting means. Based on the amount of light detected by the image information detecting means, valuable information corresponding to the amount of light is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be determined in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can accurately identify the information regarding the valuable information.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means executes image processing for taking in an image displayed on the valuable display means, digitizing and converting the image, and the information discriminating means converting by the image processing. 2. The gaming machine G3 according to claim 1, wherein the game machine G3 discriminates valuable value information corresponding to the calculated numerical value.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the image information detecting means executes the image processing of taking in the image displayed on the valuable display means, digitizing it, and converting it. Valuable value information corresponding to the numerical value converted by the image processing is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, the information regarding the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be determined in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can accurately identify the information regarding the valuable value information.

  According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game medium, an operation means having an operation unit operable by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device based on the operation means being operated. An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return processing for returning to the player or a release processing for canceling reading of the valuable information of the storage medium, and an operation section of the operation means. In order to establish a predetermined change condition, a restricting means for setting a permission state in which the player can operate and a prohibition state in which the player is more difficult to operate than the permission state. Zui, the gaming machine and wherein the switching control means for switching the regulating means to either of said disabled state and the enabled state, and has a H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. According to the lending request signal, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. A return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation of the operation means having an operation section that can be operated by the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the releasing process is output from the operation signal output means to the external device. The restricting means sets a permitting state in which the player can operate the operating portion of the operating means and a prohibiting state in which it is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitting state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the switching control means switches the restricting means to either the permitted state or the prohibited state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit by setting the prohibition state. Therefore, even if the player forgets the return process or the release process, the storage medium is stolen or valuable information is lost. The damage of abuse can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the restricting means allows the restricting member that can be arranged on the front surface side of the operating portion and the restricting member to move to the front surface side position of the operating portion and a position other than the front surface side of the operating portion. And a movable means capable of controlling the switching member, wherein the switching control means switches the state to the prohibited state by fixing the regulating member at the front side position, and releases the fixed state to change to the permitted state. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being switched.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the restricting member that can be arranged on the front surface side of the operating portion, and the restricting member are moved to the front surface side position of the operating portion and the position other than the front surface side of the operating portion by the movable means. By fixing the regulating member at the position on the front side, the switching control means switches to the prohibited state. On the other hand, by releasing the fixation, the switching control means switches to the permitted state. As a result, in the prohibited state, it becomes difficult to operate the operation unit by the restriction member, and the player can easily determine that the prohibited state is set. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind by confirming that the game is switched to the prohibited state.

  In the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the gaming machine H1 or H2 has an input unit capable of inputting identification information by a player's operation, and an identification information storage unit capable of storing the identification information input by the input unit. In the permitting state, the means switches from the permitting state to the prohibiting state, assuming that the identification information input by the inputting means is newly stored in the identification information storage means as a change condition. On the other hand, in the prohibited state, the change condition is satisfied when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit, and the permission is changed from the prohibited state. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being switched to a state.

  The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2. That is, the identification information is input by the input means by the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. In the permitted state, the switching control unit switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state, assuming that the change condition is satisfied when the identification information input by the input unit is newly stored in the identification information storage unit. On the other hand, in the prohibition state, the changeover condition from the prohibition state to the permission state is regarded as the establishment of the change condition that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means. Can be switched by. Thereby, it becomes possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state by inputting the identification information, and the prohibited state and the permitted state can be switched according to the convenience of the player. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently and with peace of mind.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium output to the gaming machine corresponding to the read valuable value information. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game medium according to a lending request signal, an external signal receiving means for receiving an external signal to be output to the game machine based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device, Whether the game is being executed by using the valuable media information discriminating device that discriminates the valuable media information based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving device and the game medium. And a game execution determining means for determining whether the game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period of time. By deciding whether the valuable value information discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means has changed by a predetermined value or more, a lending game which is a game using the game medium dispensed by the dispensing means in accordance with the lending request signal is performed. A gaming machine I1 having a lending game determination means for determining whether or not the game machine is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the value to the gaming machine corresponding to the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend. The external signal receiving means receives an external signal output to the gaming machine based on the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device. Valuable value information is discriminated by the valuable value information discriminating means based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means. The game execution determining means determines whether or not the game is being executed using the game medium. During the predetermined period of time during which the game execution determining means determines that the game is being executed using the game medium, the valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means changes by a predetermined value or more. By determining whether or not the lending game determination means determines whether the lending game, which is a game using the game medium paid out by the lending means according to the lending request signal, is being executed. As a result, the gaming machine can determine whether the lending game is being played or a game different from the lending game is being played.

  Based on the external signal, valuable display means for displaying valuable value information indicated by the external signal; and external signal extracting means for extracting the external signal for displaying the valuable display means, wherein the valuable information The discriminating means discriminates the valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means on the basis of the externally extracted signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, and the predetermined valuable value information is displayed. When the value-value information determination means determines that the lending game determination means determines that a game different from the lending game is being executed, the lending game determination means has a notification means for executing a predetermined notification. The gaming machine I2 according to claim 1, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the external signal, the valuable value information indicated by the external signal is displayed by the valuable display means. The external signal for displaying the valuable display means is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Valuable value information displayed on the valuable display means is discriminated by the valuable information discriminating means based on the external extracted signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. Based on the fact that the lending game determination means determines that a game different from the lending game is being executed when the valuable value information determination means determines that the predetermined value information is displayed Is executed by the notification means. As a result, when the lending game is not being performed, a predetermined notification is executed if the storage medium is being read by the external device, so that the player can display the valuable information of the storage medium in the external device. It can make you notice that it is being read. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player leaves the seat while the storage medium is being read in the external device, and the storage medium is stolen or the valuable information is misused.

  The game machine I1 or I2 is displayed on the display means, and a display means for displaying the identification information showing the result of the determination of the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination based on the satisfaction of the success / failure determination condition. Based on the fact that the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determining means and the dynamic display aspect determining means for determining the dynamic display aspect of the identification information is reduced, Investment amount storage means for storing, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from a plurality of the dynamic display modes based on the value of the investment amount storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine I1 or I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, the win / loss determination is executed by the win / loss determination executing means based on the satisfaction of the win / loss determination condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the decrease in the balance indicated by the valuable information judged by the valuable information judging means, the total amount of the decrease is stored in the investment amount storing means. Based on the value of the investment amount storage means, one dynamic display manner is determined from the plurality of dynamic display manners by the dynamic display manner determining means. As a result, the type of dynamic display mode that is determined can be changed based on the investment amount of the player, and different dynamic display modes can be displayed to the player who is playing the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being present. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a combination with a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a conventional gaming machine, a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a gaming medium such as a game ball to a gaming machine by using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend a gaming medium There has been proposed a device to be mounted on the vehicle (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-221336).
However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine only controls to dispense a game medium according to a command from the lending unit (card reading unit) side, and the gaming machine side does not control the lending unit. Therefore, it is impossible for the gaming machine to determine whether the lending unit has a card, coin or the like inserted therein. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the player cannot forget to remove the card, coins, etc., and the player forgets to remove the card, coins, etc., resulting in theft or loss. there were.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-exemplified problems, etc., because the player forgets to return the card, coin, etc. to the lending unit (card reading unit) of the game medium, It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disadvantage of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and is output corresponding to the read valuable value information. When the payout means for paying out the game medium according to the lending request signal for requesting the game machine to lend the game medium and the external device have read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the game machine External receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to, and an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal, and based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. , An external discriminating means for discriminating whether the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means. In a state where the external device determines that the valuable value information of the storage medium is being read, when the player detection unit does not detect the player, the external device informs the player of the storage medium. And a notification means for notifying a notification mode indicating that the valuable information is being read.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. A payout means for paying out a game medium in accordance with a lending request signal for performing the predetermined value, and a predetermined external control output to the game machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. In a gaming machine having an external receiving means for receiving a signal, the external device is a storage medium based on the external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means. External discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the valuable value information of the game is being read, game execution discriminating means for discriminating the period during which the game is being played by the player, and the game execution thereof. When it is determined by the determining means that the game has not been played for a predetermined period or more, the external determining means determines that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. And an informing means for informing a player of an informing mode indicating that the external device is in a state where the valuable information of the storage medium is being read.
In the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information. A payout means for paying out a game medium in accordance with a lending request signal for storing, a storage means capable of storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the gaming machine. An ejecting means for ejecting by a player's operation, and an external device for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. In a gaming machine having a receiving means, a storage discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game balls are stored in the storing means, and a discharging operation for discriminating whether or not the discharging of the game balls is carried out by the discharging means. A state in which the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the determination means, the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal, and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. If the external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the ejecting operation is discriminated by the ejecting operation discriminating means, and if the storing discriminating means discriminates that the game ball is not stored, the external discriminating means carries out the external operation. When it is determined that the device is in the state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the player is notified of a notification mode indicating that the external device is in the state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. And notifying means.
The game machine according to the technical idea 4 is based on any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and is based on the operation device having an operation unit operable by the player, and the operation device being operated, based on the external device. A return signal for returning the storage medium read by the player to the player, or an operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device to perform a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium, Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which output of the return signal by the operation signal output means is prohibited based on the establishment of a setting condition. And ,.
In the gaming machine of the technical idea 5, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is requested to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. For receiving the lending request signal for paying out the game medium, and a storage medium read by the external device on the basis of the operating means having an operating part operable by the player and the operating means being operated. An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return processing for returning the player to the player or a release processing for canceling the reading of the valuable value information in the storage medium, and an operating section of the operating means. And a forced return control means for outputting a return signal to the operation signal output means on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined trigger even when is not operated. A.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 6 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, and distinguishes the win / fail judgment means for executing the win / no judgment of the game based on the satisfaction of the win / no judgment condition, and the win / no judgment result of the win / no judgment means. Display control means for displaying possible identification information on the display means, and when the display means displays the identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed. The privilege game execution means and the forced return control means output the return signal to the operation signal output means on the basis of the hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss judgment means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 7, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, when the win / win determination condition is satisfied, a start condition for displaying identification information for win / win determination corresponding to the win / win determination condition is satisfied. Until the start condition is satisfied, the win / fail judgment storage means for storing the hit / miss judgment condition that has been satisfied and the hit / fail judgment result corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition stored in the hit / miss judgment storage means are determined until the start condition is satisfied. The advance return determination means for performing the forced return control means outputs the return signal to the operation signal output means based on the determination that the advance return determination means is a hit. is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, the rental of the gaming medium in which the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by the external device provided outside the gaming machine and is output corresponding to the read valuable value information According to the lending request signal for requesting the game machine, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal, the external discriminating means discriminates whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.
The player is detected by the player detecting means. When the external determination unit determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, and the player detection unit does not detect the player, the external device is stored in the player. The notification means notifies the notification mode indicating that the valuable value information of the medium is being read.
Thus, even if the player leaves the seat while the external device reads the valuable information of the storage medium, the external device reads the valuable information of the storage medium by the notification mode. It is possible to make the player notice that Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being stolen from the storage medium and being damaged by the misuse of the valuable information.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by the external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the rental of the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information is played. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting the machine. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, the external receiving means receives a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine.
The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the external determination means determines whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. The game execution determining means determines the period during which the player is playing the game. When the game execution determining means determines that the game has not been played for a predetermined period of time or more, the external determining means determines that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Then, the notification means notifies the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.
As a result, even when the player finishes playing the game with the external device reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium by the notification mode. Can be announced early. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being stolen from the storage medium and being damaged by the misuse of the valuable information.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by the external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the rental of the gaming medium is played in accordance with the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with the lending request signal for requesting the machine. The game balls paid out to the player by the payout means are stored by the storage means. The discharging means discharges the game balls stored in the storing means to the outside of the gaming machine by a player's operation. When the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means.
Whether or not the game balls are stored in the storage means is determined by the storage determination means. Whether the game balls have been discharged by the discharging means is judged by the discharging operation judging means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the external determination means determines whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. When it is determined that the discharge operation is performed by the discharge operation determination means, and when the storage determination means determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination means reads the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external device. If it is determined that the player is in the state, the notifying unit notifies the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.
As a result, when the game is finished, the operation of ejecting the game medium to the outside of the game machine is executed, and when the game medium is not detected in the storage means, the valuable information of the storage medium is read in the external device. If it is in a state, it is notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game with the external device reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Therefore, there is an effect that the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable value information can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the operation unit operation means that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process of returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium A return signal for executing the release process is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the establishment of the setting condition, the switching control means switches between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means.
As a result, even if the player forgets the return processing or the cancellation processing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable value information by switching to the prohibited state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is lent based on the read valuable value information. The game medium is paid out based on the lending request signal for requesting.
Based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player being operated, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or the reading of valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation means is not operated, the return signal is output by the forced return control means to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger.
Thereby, the storage medium read by the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be released to the external device under the control of the gaming machine side. Therefore, the player can forget the operation of returning the storage medium or the process of releasing the valuable information, thereby reducing the damage to the player due to the theft of the storage medium or the misuse of the valuable information. is there.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the win / loss determination condition, the win / loss determination of the game is executed by the win / loss determination means. The display control means displays on the display means identification information capable of identifying the result of the judgment. When the display unit displays the identification information indicating that the result of the hit determination is a hit, the privilege game executing unit executes the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player. Then, the return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss determination means.
As a result, it is possible to return the storage medium read in the external device or cancel reading the valuable value information based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player does not have to be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the external device has read the valuable value information of the storage medium, and forgetting the return process or the cancellation process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the player caused by the theft of the storage medium and the misuse of the valuable information.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when the win / fail judgment condition is met, the hit / miss judgment condition is stored by the hit / miss judgment storage means until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit / miss judgment corresponding to the hit / miss judgment condition is met. To be done. The prior win / failure determination means determines the win / no win determination result corresponding to the stored win / no win determination condition before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the fact that the advance hit determination means determines that the hit is successful.
As a result, the return process or the cancellation process is executed by the external device before the identification information indicating the win / loss judgment result is displayed on the display unit, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the win / loss judgment result in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the cancellation process will not be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
41 Balance indicator (external signal receiving means )
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means )
S108 value information discrimination hand stage

Claims (7)

According to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the game medium that the valuable value information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and output corresponding to the read valuable value information A payout means for paying out the game medium,
In a gaming machine having an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium,
External signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal,
External discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means,
Player detection means for detecting a player,
In a state where the external determination unit determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, and the player detection unit does not detect the player, A gaming machine, comprising: an informing unit for informing an informing mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium Withdrawing means for paying out
In a gaming machine having an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium,
External signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal,
External discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means,
A game execution determination means for determining a period during which a game is being played by a player,
When the game execution determination means determines that the game has not been played for a predetermined period or more, the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. The gaming machine is characterized by further comprising: a notifying unit for notifying a player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and according to the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium corresponding to the read valuable value information, the gaming medium Withdrawing means for paying out
Storage means capable of storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means,
Discharging means for discharging the game balls stored in the storing means to the outside of the game machine by a player's operation,
In a gaming machine having an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium,
Storage determination means for determining whether the game balls are stored in the storage means,
Ejection operation determination means for determining whether the ejection of the game balls has been performed by the ejection means,
External signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal,
External discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means,
When it is determined that the discharge operation has been executed by the discharge operation determination means, and when the game sphere is determined not to be stored by the storage determination means, the external device determines the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means. When it is determined that the player is in the state of reading, it has a notifying means for notifying the player of a notice mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine characterized by that. An operation unit having an operation unit operable by a player,
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operation means. An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibition state in which output of the return signal by the operation signal output means is prohibited based on the establishment of a setting condition. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized by comprising: An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, and receives a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the gaming medium based on the read valuable value information. In gaming machines that dispense gaming media,
An operation unit having an operation unit operable by a player,
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operation means. An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Forced return control means for outputting a return signal to the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger even when the operation portion of the operation means is not operated. A gaming machine characterized by. Based on the satisfaction of the win / loss determination conditions, win / loss determination means for executing the win / loss determination of the game,
Display control means for displaying on the display means identification information capable of identifying the hit determination result of the hit determination means;
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for giving a privilege to a player, when identification information indicating that the hit determination result is a hit is displayed on the display means,
6. The forced return control means causes the operation signal output means to output the return signal based on a hit / no hit determination result of the hit / miss determination means. Amusement machine. When the hit determination condition is met, hit determination storage means for storing the hit determination condition that has been met until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the hit determination corresponding to the hit determination condition is met. ,
A prior win / failure determination means for determining a win / loss determination result corresponding to the win / loss determination condition stored in the win / loss determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied,
7. The forced return control means causes the operation signal output means to output the return signal based on the fact that the advance hit determination means determines that the hit is successful. Game machine.

Images